WO2021206009A1 - Electronic device and accessory - Google Patents

Electronic device and accessory Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021206009A1
WO2021206009A1 PCT/JP2021/014288 JP2021014288W WO2021206009A1 WO 2021206009 A1 WO2021206009 A1 WO 2021206009A1 JP 2021014288 W JP2021014288 W JP 2021014288W WO 2021206009 A1 WO2021206009 A1 WO 2021206009A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
contact
accessory
contacts
camera
communication
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2021/014288
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
坂本 弘道
圭 遠山
隆之 周
ひろみ 林崎
宏治 池田
裕平 服部
石井 賢治
岡野 好伸
Original Assignee
キヤノン株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2021060601A external-priority patent/JP7087152B2/en
Application filed by キヤノン株式会社 filed Critical キヤノン株式会社
Priority to CN202410030245.2A priority Critical patent/CN117850125A/en
Priority to EP21785644.2A priority patent/EP4024128A4/en
Priority to BR112021021885A priority patent/BR112021021885A2/en
Priority to CN202180003706.1A priority patent/CN113906341B/en
Publication of WO2021206009A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021206009A1/en
Priority to US17/533,904 priority patent/US11886099B2/en
Priority to US18/514,042 priority patent/US20240085764A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B15/00Special procedures for taking photographs; Apparatus therefor
    • G03B15/02Illuminating scene
    • G03B15/03Combinations of cameras with lighting apparatus; Flash units
    • G03B15/05Combinations of cameras with electronic flash apparatus; Electronic flash units
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B17/00Details of cameras or camera bodies; Accessories therefor
    • G03B17/02Bodies
    • G03B17/12Bodies with means for supporting objectives, supplementary lenses, filters, masks, or turrets
    • G03B17/14Bodies with means for supporting objectives, supplementary lenses, filters, masks, or turrets interchangeably
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B17/00Details of cameras or camera bodies; Accessories therefor
    • G03B17/56Accessories
    • G03B17/565Optical accessories, e.g. converters for close-up photography, tele-convertors, wide-angle convertors
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B7/00Control of exposure by setting shutters, diaphragms or filters, separately or conjointly
    • G03B7/26Power supplies; Circuitry or arrangement to switch on the power source; Circuitry to check the power source voltage
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B2206/00Systems for exchange of information between different pieces of apparatus, e.g. for exchanging trimming information, for photo finishing
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B2215/00Special procedures for taking photographs; Apparatus therefor
    • G03B2215/05Combinations of cameras with electronic flash units
    • G03B2215/0514Separate unit
    • G03B2215/056Connection with camera, e.g. adapter
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
    • H04N23/56Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof provided with illuminating means

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to electronic devices and accessories having contacts used for communication, mounting detection, and the like.
  • the accessory shoe is provided with a plurality of contacts (terminals) for detecting the attachment of the accessory to the camera and for communicating between the camera and the accessory.
  • the present invention provides an electronic device and an accessory capable of reducing the occurrence of a communication error due to some terminals becoming non-contact when the accessory is attached.
  • accessories are detachably attached, and a plurality of contacts electrically connected to the accessories are arranged in a row.
  • the plurality of contacts include a mounting detection contact used for detecting the mounting of an accessory on an electronic device and a communication request contact used for a communication request from the accessory to the electronic device.
  • the mounting detection contact and the communication request contact are arranged between the contact on the one end side and the contact on the other end side in the arrangement direction of the plurality of contacts.
  • the mounting detection contact is arranged between the communication request contact and the contact on the farthest end side. In the arrangement direction of the contacts, the distance between the mounting detection contact and the communication request contact is shorter than the distance between the communication request contact and the contact on the farthest end side.
  • the accessory as another aspect of the present invention is detachably attached to an electronic device, and a plurality of contacts electrically connected to the electronic device are arranged in a row.
  • the plurality of contacts include a mounting detection contact used for detecting the mounting of an accessory on an electronic device and a communication request contact used for a communication request from the accessory to the electronic device.
  • the mounting detection contact and the communication request contact are arranged between the contact on the one end side and the contact on the other end side in the arrangement direction of the plurality of contacts.
  • the mounting detection contact is arranged between the communication request contact and the contact on the farthest end side. In the arrangement direction of the contacts, the distance between the mounting detection contact and the communication request contact is shorter than the distance between the communication request contact and the contact on the farthest end side.
  • a system including the electronic device and the accessory also constitutes another aspect of the present invention.
  • the figure which shows the structure of the camera and the accessory in embodiment of this invention The figure which shows the camera which attached the accessory in embodiment, and the arrangement example of the contact point with them. The figure which shows how the external force is applied to the accessory attached to the camera in embodiment. The figure which shows the structure for determining the connection state of the ground contact in an embodiment.
  • the flowchart which shows the process executed by the camera in embodiment The flowchart which shows the process executed by the camera of embodiment.
  • FIG. 3 is a perspective view of an external flash unit which is a camera and an accessory in the embodiment. Exploded view and perspective view of the accessory shoe in the embodiment. The figure which shows the structure of the engaging member of the accessory shoe and the connection terminal connector in embodiment.
  • a perspective view and a cross-sectional view of the external flash unit according to the embodiment.
  • the front sectional view which shows the state which the camera connection part was attached to the accessory shoe in embodiment.
  • FIG. 1 shows an electrical configuration of a camera 100 as an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention and an accessory 200 detachably attached to the camera 100.
  • the plurality of contacts (terminals) TC01 to TC21 of the camera connection portion 141 provided in the camera 100 and the plurality of contacts TA01 to TA21 of the accessory connection portion 211 provided in the accessory 200 are one-to-one, respectively. It is electrically connected by contacting with.
  • the camera 100 is supplied with electric power from the battery 111.
  • the battery 111 can be attached to and detached from the camera 100.
  • the camera control circuit 101 as a control means of the camera 100 is a circuit that controls the entire camera 100, and is composed of a microcomputer having a built-in CPU or the like.
  • the system power supply circuit 112 is a circuit that generates power for supplying power to each circuit of the camera 100, and is composed of a DCDC converter circuit, an LDO (Low Drop Out), a charge pump circuit, and the like.
  • the voltage 1.8V generated by the system power supply circuit 112 is constantly supplied from the battery 111 to the camera control circuit 101 as the camera microcomputer power supply VMCU_C.
  • the camera control circuit 101 controls the system power supply circuit 112 to turn on / off the power supply to each circuit of the camera 100.
  • the optical lens 121 is removable from the camera 100.
  • the light from the subject incident through the optical lens 121 is imaged on the image pickup sensor 122 including a CMOS sensor, a CCD sensor, or the like.
  • the subject image formed on the image pickup sensor 122 is encoded into a digital image pickup signal.
  • the image processing circuit 123 performs image processing such as noise reduction processing and white balance processing on the digital image pickup signal to generate image data, and in order to record the image data in the recording memory 126, a PEG format or the like is used. Convert to an image file of. Further, the image processing circuit 123 generates VRAM image data for display on the display circuit 127 from the image data.
  • the memory control circuit 124 controls the transmission and reception of image data and other data generated by the image processing circuit 123 and the like.
  • the volatile memory 125 is a memory capable of high-speed reading and writing such as DDR3 SDRAM, and is used for an image processing workspace or the like performed by the image processing circuit 123.
  • the recording memory 126 is a readable and writable recording medium such as an SD card or CFexpress card that can be attached to and detached from the camera 100 via a connection portion (not shown).
  • the display circuit 127 is a display arranged on the back surface of the camera 100, and is composed of an LCD panel, an organic EL display panel, and the like.
  • the backlight circuit 128 adjusts the brightness of the display circuit 127 by changing the amount of light from the backlight of the display circuit 127.
  • the accessory power supply circuit A131 and the accessory power supply circuit B132 as the power supply means are voltage conversion circuits that convert the voltage supplied from the system power supply circuit 112 into a predetermined voltage, respectively. Generates .3V.
  • the accessory power supply circuit A131 is a power supply circuit composed of an LDO or the like and having low self-consumption.
  • the accessory power supply circuit B132 is a circuit composed of a DC / DC converter circuit or the like and capable of passing a larger current than the accessory power supply circuit A131.
  • the self-consumption of the accessory power supply circuit B132 is larger than that of the accessory power supply circuit A131. Therefore, when the load current is small, the accessory power supply circuit A131 is more efficient than the accessory power supply circuit B132, and when the load current is large, the accessory power supply circuit B132 is more efficient than the accessory power supply circuit A131.
  • the camera control circuit 101 controls on / off of the voltage output of the accessory power supply circuit A131 and the accessory power supply circuit B132 according to the operating state of the accessory 200.
  • the protection circuit 133 as a protection means is composed of a current fuse element, a polyswitch element, an electronic fuse circuit that combines a resistor, an amplifier, and a switch element, and the like, from the accessory power supply circuit A131 and the accessory power supply circuit B132 to the accessory 200.
  • the overcurrent detection signal DET_OVC is output.
  • the protection circuit 133 is an electronic fuse circuit, and when a current of 1 A or more flows, the camera control circuit 101 is notified by an overcurrent detection signal DET_OVC.
  • the overcurrent detection signal DET_OVC indicates that the overcurrent is due to the Hi level.
  • the camera connection unit 141 is a connector for making an electrical connection with the accessory 200 via 21 contacts TC01 to TC21 arranged in a row.
  • the contacts TC01 to TC21 are arranged in this order from one end to the other end in the arrangement direction thereof.
  • the TC01 is connected to the ground (GND) and is used not only as a contact for the reference potential (GND potential) but also as a contact for controlling the wiring impedance of the differential signal D1N and the differential signal D1P described below. ing. TC01 corresponds to the third ground contact.
  • the differential signal D1N connected to the TC02 and the differential signal D1P connected to the TC03 are differential data communication signals that perform data communication in pairs, and are connected to the camera control circuit 101.
  • TC02, TC03, TC07 to TC17, TC19 and TC20, which will be described later, are communication contacts.
  • TC04 as the first ground contact is connected to GND and serves as a reference potential contact between the camera 100 and the accessory 200.
  • the TC04 is arranged outside the TC05 described below in the contact arrangement direction.
  • the accessory power supply VACC generated by the accessory power supply circuits A131 and B132 is connected to the TC05 as the power supply contact via the protection circuit 133.
  • the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET is connected to TC06 as the mounting detection contact.
  • the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET is pulled up to the camera microcomputer power supply VMCU_C via the resistance element Rp134 (10 k ⁇ ).
  • the camera control circuit 101 can detect whether or not the accessory 200 is attached by reading the accessory attachment detection signal / ACC_DET signal level. If the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET signal level (potential) is Hi level (predetermined potential), accessory 200 is detected as not mounted, and if it is Lo level (GND potential as described later), accessory 200 is mounted. Detected.
  • the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET signal level (potential) changes from the Hi level to the Lo level as a trigger, and various transmissions are performed between the camera 100 and the accessory 200 via contacts.
  • the camera control circuit 101 supplies power to the accessory 200 via the TC05 as a power contact in response to detecting that the accessory 200 is in the mounted state.
  • the camera control circuit 101 acts as a communication master to perform SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication. It is a signal.
  • SPI Serial Peripheral Interface
  • the communication clock frequency of SPI communication is 1 MHz.
  • a communication request signal / WAKE for requesting communication from the accessory 200 to the camera control circuit 101 is connected to the TC11.
  • the communication request signal / WAKE is pulled up to the camera microcomputer power supply VMCU_C via a resistor.
  • the camera control circuit 101 can receive the communication request from the accessory 200 by detecting the communication request signal / the falling edge of WAKE.
  • the SDA connected to the TC12 and the SCL connected to the TC13 are signals for the camera control circuit 101 to act as a communication master and perform I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.
  • the SDA and SCL are signals for open-drain communication (hereinafter referred to as open-drain communication) pulled up to the camera microcomputer power supply VMCU_C, and the communication frequency is 100 kbps in this embodiment.
  • I2C communication both data transmission from the camera 100 and data transmission from the accessory 200 are performed via the SDA. Comparing SPI communication and I2C communication, I2C communication has a lower communication speed than SPI communication, and communication with low power consumption is possible. Further, SPI communication has a higher communication speed than I2C communication, and is therefore suitable for communication of information having a large amount of data. Therefore, in the communication between the camera 100 and the accessory 200 of the present embodiment, the information having a large amount of data is communicated by using SPI communication, and the information having a small amount of data is communicated by using I2C communication. For example, data is first communicated using I2C communication, and when SPI communication can be executed or SPI communication needs to be executed based on this data, control is performed so that SPI communication is further executed. Can be done.
  • the FNC1 signal connected to the TC14 (synchronous contact), the FNC2 signal connected to the TC15, the FNC3 signal connected to the TC16, and the FNC4 signal connected to the TC17 change their functions according to the type of accessory 200 installed. It is a possible signal.
  • the signal communicated via the TC 15 is an audio data signal.
  • the signal communicated via the TC 14 is a signal for controlling the timing of light emission.
  • signals that realize different functions may be communicated via the same contact.
  • a synchronization signal for controlling a timing different from the light emission timing may be communicated via the TC14.
  • TC14 to TC17 correspond to functional signal contacts. Communication using at least one of the functional signal contacts is also referred to as functional signal communication.
  • Functional signal communication can execute communication at a timing that does not depend on I2C communication / SPI communication in parallel with I2C communication / SPI communication.
  • the types of accessories referred to here are the above-mentioned microphone devices, lighting devices, and the like. Accessories that achieve the same purpose, such as lights with different performances, are the same type of accessory. Accessories that achieve different purposes, such as microphone and lighting equipment, are different types of accessories.
  • Functional signal communication is executed based on the information acquired by I2C communication or SPI communication.
  • the TC18 as the second ground contact is also connected to GND, and is the contact that serves as the reference potential between the camera 100 and the accessory 200, like the TC04.
  • the differential signal D2N connected to TC19 (first differential signal contact) and the differential signal D2P connected to TC20 (second differential signal contact) are data in which they perform data communication in pairs. It is a communication signal and is connected to the camera control circuit 101. For example, USB communication can be performed via TC19 and TC20.
  • the TC21 is connected to GND and is used not only as a contact for a reference potential but also as a contact for controlling the wiring impedance of the differential signal D2N and the differential signal D2P.
  • TC21 corresponds to the fourth ground contact.
  • the contacts TC01, TC04, TC06, TC18, and TC21 are connected to, for example, the GND portion of the flexible substrate 158 shown in FIG. 17, which will be described later, and the GND portion of the flexible substrate 158 becomes the GND level of the camera 100. It is fixed at 157 or the like.
  • Metallic members having a GND level include, for example, an engaging member 151, a base plate (not shown) inside the camera 100, and the like.
  • the mounting detection contact TC06 to which the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET is connected is arranged next to the contact (first clock contact) TC07 that transmits the clock signal SCLK (first clock signal). doing.
  • noise clock noise
  • SCLK first clock signal
  • the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET is pulled up before the accessory is mounted, but is set to the GND potential after the accessory is mounted.
  • the SCLK contact TC07 that transmits the clock signal does not transmit the clock signal before the accessory is attached, the potential does not fluctuate, and the potential fluctuates because the clock signal is transmitted only after the accessory is attached.
  • the mounting detection contact TC06 When the SCLK contact TC07 transmits a clock signal, the mounting detection contact TC06 is at the GND potential. Therefore, even if the mounting detection contact TC06 receives clock noise, the potential of the control circuit of the camera 100 or the accessory 200 is unlikely to fluctuate, so that malfunction can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to suppress the transmission of clock noise to a position farther than the mounting detection contact TC06. As a result, since it is not necessary to arrange the GND terminal, the influence of clock noise can be suppressed without increasing the number of contacts.
  • SCL second clock signal
  • SCLK second clock signal
  • the frequency of SCLK transmitted to the SCLK contact TC07 is higher than that of the SCL, and the SCLK contact TC07 generates more clock noise than the SCL contact TC13. Therefore, if the mounting detection contact TC06 is arranged next to the SCLK contact TC07 instead of next to the SCL contact TC13, the effect of preventing malfunction due to clock noise is greater.
  • the SCL transmitted by the SCL contact TC13 is a clock signal of the I2C communication standard, and the fluctuation of the voltage of the signal line is driven by the open drain connection.
  • the SCLK transmitted by the SCLK contact TC07 is a clock signal of the SPI communication standard, and the fluctuation of the voltage of the signal line is driven by the CMOS output. Therefore, the SCL contact TC13 tends to have a gentler edge of voltage fluctuation than the SCLK contact TC07, and clock noise is less likely to occur. Therefore, arranging the mounting detection contact TC06 next to the SCLK contact TC07 rather than next to the SCL contact TC13 is more effective in preventing malfunction due to clock noise.
  • the differential signals D1N and D1P may be transmitted in pairs to the first and second differential signal contacts TC19 and TC20 to transmit the clock signal.
  • a clock signal (third clock signal) having a frequency higher than that of the SCLK contact TC07 and the SCL contact TC13 may be transmitted.
  • the differential signals D1N and D1P are pair signals, the emission of clock noise is smaller than that of the SCLK contact TC07 and the SCL contact TC13 that transmit the single-ended signal. Therefore, it is more effective to prevent the malfunction due to the clock noise by arranging the mounting detection contact TC06 next to the SCLK contact TC07 instead of next to the first and second differential signal contacts TC19 and TC20.
  • the contact (first data contact) TC08 arranged next to the mounting detection contact TC06 of the SCLK contact TC07 transmits MOSI (first data signal). Since MOSI is a data signal, it appears to be susceptible to clock noise. However, since the MOSI is a data signal of the same SPI communication standard as the clock signal transmitted by the SCLK contact TC07, the fluctuation timing of the potential is synchronized with the clock signal and is not easily affected by the clock noise. Therefore, the contact TC08 does not have to be fixed to the GND potential and can be used as a MOSI contact.
  • the accessory 200 has a battery 205 and receives power supply from the battery 205 and also receives power supply from the camera 100 via the camera connection unit 141 and the accessory connection unit 211.
  • the accessory control circuit 201 as a control means of the accessory 200 is a circuit that controls the entire accessory 200, and is a microcomputer having a built-in CPU and the like.
  • the accessory power supply circuit 202 is a circuit that generates a power supply for supplying power to each circuit of the accessory 200, and is composed of a DCDC converter circuit, an LDO, a charge pump circuit, and the like.
  • the voltage 1.8V generated by the accessory power supply circuit 202 is constantly supplied to the accessory control circuit 201 as the accessory microcomputer power supply VMCU_A. By controlling the accessory power supply circuit 202, on / off control of power supply to each circuit of the accessory 200 is performed.
  • the charging circuit 204 is a circuit for charging the battery 205 using the electric power supplied from the camera 100.
  • the accessory control circuit 201 controls the charging circuit 204 to charge the battery 205.
  • the accessory 200 may operate only by supplying power from the camera 100 without mounting the battery 205. In this case, the charging circuit 204 becomes unnecessary.
  • the differential communication circuit 207 is a circuit for performing differential communication with the camera 100, and can transmit and receive data to and from the camera 100.
  • the external communication IF circuit 208 is an IF circuit for performing data communication with an external device (not shown), such as an Ethernet communication IF, a wireless LAN communication IF, and a public network communication IF.
  • the accessory control circuit 201 controls the differential communication circuit 207 and the external communication IF circuit 208 to transmit the data received from the camera 100 to the external device or the data received from the external device to the camera 100. be able to.
  • the functional circuit 206 is a circuit having different functions depending on the type of the accessory 200. A configuration example of the functional circuit 206 will be described later.
  • the external connection terminal 209 is a connector terminal for connecting to an external device, and is a USB TYPE-C connector in this embodiment.
  • the connection detection circuit 210 is a circuit for detecting that an external device is connected to the external connection terminal 209, and the accessory control circuit 201 connects to the external connection terminal 209 by receiving the output signal of the connection detection circuit 210. External device connection can be detected.
  • the power switch 203 is a switch for turning on / off the operation of the accessory 200, and the accessory control circuit 201 can detect the on position and the off position by reading the signal level of the terminal to which the power switch 203 is connected.
  • the accessory connection unit 211 is a connector for electrically connecting to the camera 100 via 21 contacts TA01 to TA21 arranged in a row.
  • the contacts TA01 to TA21 are arranged in this order from one end to the other end in the arrangement direction.
  • the TA01 is connected to GND and can be used not only as a contact for a reference potential but also as a contact for controlling the wiring impedance of the differential signal D1N and the differential signal D1P.
  • TA01 corresponds to the third ground contact.
  • the differential signal D1N connected to TA02 and the differential signal D1P connected to TA03 are data communication signals in which they perform data communication in pairs, and are connected to the differential communication circuit 207.
  • TA02, TA03, TA07 to TA17, TA19 and TA20 described later are communication contacts.
  • TA04 as the first ground contact is connected to GND and serves as a reference potential contact between the camera 100 and the accessory 200.
  • the TA04 is arranged outside the TA05 described below in the contact arrangement direction.
  • the accessory power supply circuit 202 and the charging circuit 204 are connected to the TA05 as the power supply contact, and the accessory power supply VACC supplied from the camera 100 is connected.
  • the TA06 as a mounting detection contact is directly connected to the GND, and when the accessory 200 is mounted on the camera 100, the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET described above is set to the GND level as the Lo level. As a result, it becomes a contact point for causing the camera 100 to detect the attachment of the accessory 200.
  • the SCLK connected to TA07, the MOSI connected to TA08, the MISO connected to TA09, and the CS connected to TA10 are signals for the accessory control circuit 201 to act as a communication slave for SPI communication.
  • a communication request signal / WAKE for requesting communication from the camera 100 from the accessory control circuit 201 is connected to the TA11.
  • the accessory control circuit 201 determines that communication with the camera 100 is necessary, the accessory control circuit 201 makes a communication request to the camera 100 by outputting a communication request signal / WAKE Lo.
  • the accessory control circuit 201 When power is supplied from the camera control circuit 101 to the accessory 200 via the TC5 in response to detecting that the accessory 200 is in the mounted state, the accessory control circuit 201 receives a communication request signal / WAKE signal level ( By changing the potential) from the Hi level to the Lo level, the camera control circuit 101 is notified that the power supply has been received.
  • the accessory control circuit 201 changes the communication request signal / WAKE signal level (potential) from the Hi level to the Lo level even if there is no request from the camera, so that a factor that causes the accessory 200 to communicate with the camera 100 has occurred. Can be notified. With this configuration, the camera control circuit 101 can omit the operation of periodically checking whether or not a factor for communication has occurred in the accessory 200 by polling. In addition, the accessory 200 can communicate to the camera 100 in real time when a factor to be communicated occurs.
  • the SDA connected to the TA12 and the SCL connected to the TA13 are signals for the accessory control circuit 201 to act as a communication slave and perform I2C communication.
  • the FNC1 signal connected to the TA14 (synchronous contact), the FNC2 signal connected to the TA15, the FNC3 signal connected to the TA16, and the FNC4 signal connected to the TA17 are signals whose functions can be changed according to the type of the accessory 200. Is. For example, when the accessory 200 is a microphone device, it is a voice data signal, and when the accessory 200 is a strobe device, it is a signal for controlling the timing of light emission.
  • TA14 to TA17 correspond to functional signal contacts.
  • the TA18 as the second ground contact is also connected to GND, and like the TA04, it becomes the reference potential contact between the camera 100 and the accessory 200.
  • the differential signal D2N connected to TA19 (first differential signal contact) and the differential signal D2P connected to TA20 (second differential signal contact) are data in which they are paired to perform data communication. It is a communication signal and is connected to the external connection terminal 209.
  • the TA21 is connected to GND and can be used not only as a contact point for a reference potential but also as a terminal for controlling the wiring impedance of the differential signal D2N and the differential signal D2P.
  • TA21 corresponds to the fourth ground contact.
  • the contacts TA01, TA04, TA06, TA18, and TA21 are connected to, for example, the GND portion of the flexible substrate 259 shown in FIG. 19 described later, and the GND portion of the flexible substrate 259 is not a metallic member that becomes the GND level of the accessory 200. It is fixed with the screws shown in the figure.
  • Metallic members having a GND level include, for example, a shoe mounting leg 251 and a base plate (not shown) inside the accessory 200.
  • FIG. 2A the accessory connecting portion 211 arranged on the shoe provided on the lower part of the accessory (strobe device) 200 is connected to the camera connecting portion 141 arranged on the accessory shoe provided on the upper part of the camera 100. It shows the state that was done.
  • FIG. 2B shows an arrangement example of 21 contacts TC01 to TC21 in the camera connection portion 141. TC01 is arranged at the right end when viewed from the subject side, and 21 contacts up to TC21 are arranged in a row. The accessory shoe is attached by sliding from the upper side to the lower side in FIG. 2B with respect to the accessory shoe having the camera connection portion 141.
  • FIG. 2C shows an arrangement example of 21 contacts TA01 to TA21 in the accessory connection portion 211. Similar to the camera connection portion 141, the TA01 is arranged at the right end when viewed from the subject side, and 21 contacts up to the TA21 are arranged in a row. Normally, the contacts TA01 to TA21 and the corresponding contacts TC01 to TC21 are in contact with each other. However, if excessive static pressure or impact is applied to the accessory 200, the contacts may be separated from each other. In particular, when a force in the rotational direction acts on the direction in which the contacts are lined up in the accessory 200, contact separation is likely to occur at the end contacts.
  • FIG. 3A exaggerates the appearance of excessive static pressure applied to the accessory 200 from the left side when viewed from the subject side.
  • a force acts on the contacts TC21, TA21 of the camera connecting portion 141 and the accessory connecting portion 211 and the contacts in the vicinity thereof in the direction in which the contacts are separated from each other, and poor contact is likely to occur.
  • a force acts on the contacts TC01 and TA01 and the contacts in the vicinity thereof in the direction of contact more than in the normal state.
  • FIG. 3B exaggerates the appearance of excessive static pressure applied to the accessory 200 from the right side when viewed from the subject side.
  • a force acts on the contacts TC01 and TA01 of the camera connecting portion 141 and the accessory connecting portion 211 and the contacts in the vicinity thereof in the direction in which the contacts are separated from each other, and poor contact is likely to occur.
  • a force acts on the contacts TC21, TA21 and the contacts in the vicinity thereof in the direction of contact more than in the normal state.
  • the contacts TC01, TA01 and TC21, TA21 at both ends of the camera connecting portion 141 and the accessory connecting portion 211 are connected to the GND.
  • the GND connection can be secured at the contact at the other end. Therefore, the reference potential of the accessory 200 becomes unstable due to the poor GND connection, and as a result, the risk of damage to each circuit or electric element can be reduced.
  • the camera control circuit 101 cannot detect that a part of the GND contacts is missing when the accessory 200 without some GND contacts is attached due to a defect failure of the accessory connection portion 211 or the like. In such a case, the operating current is concentrated on the remaining GND contacts, and there is a concern that the accessory 200 may malfunction in some cases.
  • FIG. 4A is an example of a configuration for allowing the camera 100 to detect the connection state of the GND contact of the accessory 200, and shows an excerpt of a portion related to the ground contact from the configuration shown in FIG.
  • TC01, TC04, TC18 and TC21 are connected to the input terminals P1, P2, P3 and P4 of the camera control circuit 101, respectively, and are pulled to the camera microcomputer power supply VMCU_C via the resistors 1011Rp_g1, the resistors 1021Rp_g2, the resistors 1031Rp_g3 and the resistors 1041Rp_g4, respectively. It has been uploaded. Further, SW circuit 1 (1012), SW circuit 2 (1022), SW circuit 3 (1032) and SW circuit 4 (1042) are connected to TC01, TC04, TC18 and TC21, respectively.
  • the SW circuit 1 is a switch circuit driven by the control signal of the camera control circuit 101, and when it is turned on by the control signal, the TC01 is connected to GND. It is desirable that the SW circuit 1 is composed of, for example, FETs, the impedance when the operation is on is as small as possible, and the impedance when the operation is off is as large as possible.
  • the SW circuit 2, the SW circuit 3, and the SW circuit 4 also have the same configuration as the SW circuit 1 as shown in FIG. 4A.
  • the flowchart of FIG. 4B shows a sequence for determining the connection state of the ground terminal in the configuration shown in FIG. 4A.
  • the camera control circuit 101 executes this process and other processes described later according to a computer program.
  • S means a step.
  • the camera control circuit 101 monitors the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET signal level and determines whether or not the accessory 200 is mounted. If the signal level is Hi, the camera control circuit 101 returns to S1001 and performs detection again, assuming that the accessory 200 is not attached, and if the signal level is Lo, proceeds to S1002 assuming that the accessory 200 is attached.
  • the camera control circuit 101 controls to turn on the SW circuit 1 and turn off the SW circuit 2, the SW circuit 3, and the SW circuit 4, respectively.
  • the camera control circuit 101 confirms the voltage level of the input terminal P1, determines that TC01 is connected to the ground contact if it is Lo level, and that it is not connected to the ground contact if it is Hi level. judge.
  • the camera control circuit 101 controls to turn on the SW circuit 2 and turn off the SW circuit 1, the SW circuit 3, and the SW circuit 4, respectively.
  • the camera control circuit 101 confirms the voltage level of the input terminal P2, determines that the TC04 is connected to the ground contact if it is Lo level, and that it is not connected to the ground contact if it is Hi level. judge.
  • the camera control circuit 101 controls to turn on the SW circuit 3 and turn off the SW circuit 1, the SW circuit 2, and the SW circuit 4, respectively.
  • the camera control circuit 101 confirms the voltage level of the input terminal P3, and if it is Lo level, it is determined that TC18 is connected to the ground contact, and if it is Hi level, it is determined that it is not connected to the ground contact. ..
  • the camera control circuit 101 controls to turn on the SW circuit 4 and turn off the SW circuit 1, the SW circuit 2, and the SW circuit 3, respectively.
  • the camera control circuit 101 confirms the voltage level of the input terminal P4, determines that the TC18 is connected to the ground contact if it is Lo level, and that it is not connected to the ground contact if it is Hi level. judge.
  • the camera control circuit 101 controls to turn on the SW circuit 1, the SW circuit 2, the SW circuit 3, and the SW circuit 4, respectively.
  • the accessory 200 is tilted with respect to the camera 100 when the accessory 200 is attached to the camera 100, only some of the plurality of contacts TC01 to TC21 and TA01 to TA21 come into contact with each other. obtain.
  • the mounting direction of the accessory 200 with respect to the camera 100 is the Z direction
  • the direction in which the plurality of contacts TC01 to TC21 and TA01 to TA21 are lined up is the X direction
  • the direction orthogonal to the X direction and the Z direction is the Y direction.
  • the attachment detection process is executed prior to various communications in the state where the accessory 200 is attached to the camera 100.
  • the mounting detection process can be executed.
  • the communication request signal / WAKE is output from the accessory 200 to the camera 100 via the contacts (hereinafter, also referred to as communication request contacts) TC11 and TA11.
  • the camera 100 determines that the accessory 200 is in a communicable state and performs various communications.
  • the camera 100 determines that a communication error with the accessory 200 has occurred. If the accessory 200 is tilted or twisted while the accessory 200 is attached to the camera 100, only some of the contacts are temporarily in contact with each other, and it is determined that a communication error has occurred. If the error processing is performed, the user may misunderstand that the accessory 200 is out of order.
  • the arrangement of contacts is adopted so as to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which the camera 100 cannot detect the communication request signal / WAKE even though the attachment of the accessory 200 to the camera 100 is detected. ..
  • the contacts TC01 and TA01 and the contacts in the vicinity thereof come into contact with each other as shown in FIG. 3A, and the contacts TC21 and TA21 Either the contacts in the vicinity of and the contacts in the vicinity of the contact are not in contact with each other, or the contacts in the vicinity of the contacts TC21 and TA21 are in contact with each other and the contacts in the vicinity of the contacts TC01 and TA01 are not in contact with each other as shown in FIG. ..
  • the contacts TC06 and TA06 are used to detect the attachment of the accessory 200 to the camera 100.
  • the contacts TC01 and TA01 when the contacts TC01 and TA01 are in contact with each other, the contacts TC06 and TA06 arranged in the vicinity thereof often also come into contact with each other.
  • the camera 100 has the communication request signal / WAKE even though the attachment of the accessory 200 to the camera 100 is detected. Is likely to be undetectable.
  • the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 and the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 are located on the most one end side in the direction in which a plurality of contacts TC01 to TC21 and TA01 to TA21 are arranged (hereinafter referred to as contact arrangement direction). It is arranged between the contacts TC01 and TA01 and the contacts TC21 and TA21 on the farthest end side. This arrangement relationship is referred to as the first arrangement relationship. Further, the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 are arranged between the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 and the contacts TC01 and TA01. This arrangement relationship is referred to as a second arrangement relationship.
  • the distance between the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 and the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 is shorter than the distance between the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 and the contacts TC21 and TA21.
  • This arrangement relationship is referred to as a third arrangement relationship.
  • the contacts TC01 to TC21 and TA01 to TA21 are arranged at equal pitches, so that the distance between the contacts here can be rephrased as the number of other contacts arranged between the contacts.
  • a short distance (long) can be rephrased as a small number (large) of other contacts.
  • the distance between the communication request contacts TC11, TA11 and the contacts TC01, TA01 is set to be equal to or less than the distance between the communication request contacts TC11, TA11 and the contacts TC21, TA21 in the contact arrangement direction.
  • This arrangement relationship is referred to as a fourth arrangement relationship.
  • the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 are arranged in the center of the contacts TC01 to TC21 and TC01 to TC21, the distance between the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 and the contacts TC01 and TA01, and the communication request contact TC11.
  • the distances between the TA11 and the contacts TC21 and TA21 are equal to each other.
  • the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 do not necessarily have to be arranged at the center of the contacts TC01 to TC21 and TC01 to TC21, but it is preferably arranged near the center.
  • the distance between the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 and the contacts TC01 and TA01 is equal to or greater than the distance between the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 and the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 in the contact arrangement direction. It is supposed to be.
  • This arrangement relationship is referred to as a fifth arrangement relationship.
  • the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 are arranged in the center between the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 and the contacts TC01 and TA01, and the distance between the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 and the contacts TC01 and TA01.
  • the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 do not necessarily have to be arranged at the center between the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 and the contacts TC01 and TA01, but it is preferable to arrange them near the center.
  • a case where the positions of the contacts TC06 and TA06 and the contacts TC11 and TA11 are exchanged will be described. That is, a case where the contacts TC11 and TA11 are used for mounting detection and the contacts TC06 and TA06 are used for detecting the communication request signal / WAKE will be described.
  • the contacts TC11 and TA11 for mounting detection come into contact with each other, but the communication request signal / contact for WAKE.
  • TC06 and TA06 may not come into contact with each other, resulting in a communication error.
  • the contact for mounting detection on one end side in the contact arrangement direction rather than the contact for the communication request signal / WAKE as in the present embodiment.
  • the accessory 200 holds a plurality of contacts with a connection plug 256 as a holding member formed of a non-conductive material such as a resin material.
  • the connection plug 256 may have a convex shape toward the lower side (contact direction with the camera connection portion 141) in the drawing. In such a case, a state in which the contact on one end side in the contact arrangement direction of the plurality of contacts contacts but the contact on the other end side does not contact is more likely to occur.
  • the contact arrangement as in the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of communication errors even if some of the contacts become non-contact when the accessory 200 is attached to the camera 100.
  • the contact on one end side in the contact arrangement direction of the plurality of contacts contacts, but the contact on the other end side It can be in a non-contact state.
  • the contact timings of the plurality of contacts are deviated. If the contact timing deviation is large, the time lag from the detection of attachment of the accessory 200 to the camera 100 to the detection of WAKE becomes long, and as a result, a communication error may be determined.
  • the contacts TC01 and TA01 sides start to come into contact first, or the contacts TC21 and TA21 sides start to come into contact first.
  • the contact TC07 used for SPI communication (communication in the second communication method) between the camera 100 and the accessory 200 at a position between the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 and the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11.
  • TA07 to TC10, TA10 are arranged.
  • I2C communication (communication in the first communication method) between the camera 100 and the accessory 200 at a position close to the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 on the opposite side of the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06.
  • the contacts TC12, TA12, TC13, and TA13 are arranged.
  • Communication between the camera 100 and the accessory 200 is executed after the camera 100 detects the communication request signal / WAKE. Therefore, until the communication between the camera 100 and the accessory 200 is executed, the contact of the contacts used for the communication is not confirmed.
  • the mounting detection contacts TC06, TA06 and the communication request contacts TC11, TA11 are in contact with each other, the communication contacts TC07, TA07 to TC10, TA10 arranged between and in the vicinity thereof, respectively.
  • TC12, TA12, TC13, TA13 can also be considered to be in contact.
  • the contact used for SPI communication executed after I2C communication is used. It is preferable to arrange it at a position between the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 and the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11.
  • a configuration in which the number of contacts is smaller than that of the camera 100 can be considered as the configuration of the accessory 200.
  • the mounting detection contact and the communication request contact are necessary contacts, and it is preferable to arrange the mounting detection contact and the communication request contact with the same idea as in the configuration in which the number of contacts is the same as that of the camera 100.
  • the distance between the communication request contact TA11 and the contact TA01 is larger than the distance between the communication request contact TA11 and the contact TA20 in the contact arrangement direction. Will also be longer. That is, it does not satisfy the above-mentioned fourth arrangement relationship.
  • the distance between the mounting detection contact TA06 and the contact TA04 in the contact arrangement direction is set to the mounting detection contact TA06. It is shorter than the distance to the communication request contact TA11. That is, it does not satisfy the above-mentioned fifth arrangement relationship.
  • the mounting detection contact so as to satisfy the above-mentioned first to fifth arrangement relationships in consideration of the distance from the protrusion 256a instead of the distance from the contact at the end.
  • communication request contacts may be arranged.
  • the flowchart of FIG. 5A shows a process executed by the camera control circuit 101 when the accessory 200 is attached to the camera 100.
  • the camera control circuit 101 as a mounting detection means monitors the signal level of the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET and determines whether or not the accessory 200 is mounted. If the signal level is Hi, the camera control circuit 101 returns to S401 and performs detection again, assuming that the accessory 200 is not attached, and if the signal level is Lo, proceeds to S402 assuming that the accessory 200 is attached.
  • the camera control circuit 101 sets the power supply control signal CNT_VACC1 to Hi level in order to turn on the output of the accessory power supply circuit A131, and proceeds to S403.
  • the accessory power supply circuit A131 outputs the accessory power supply VACC in response to the power supply control signal CNT_VACC1 becoming Hi.
  • the camera control circuit 101 monitors the signal level of the overcurrent detection signal DET_OVC and determines whether or not an overcurrent is flowing. If the signal level is Lo, the camera control circuit 101 proceeds to S404 assuming that no overcurrent has flowed, and if the signal level is Hi, proceeds to S405 assuming that an overcurrent has flowed and performs error processing.
  • FIG. 6 (a) schematically shows a change in the above signal when the process proceeds to S404 in the process of FIG. 5 (a).
  • IACC is the current of the accessory power supply VACC. Since the accessory power supply VACC normally starts up after the power supply control signal CNT_VACC1 is set to Hi in S402, the overcurrent detection signal DET_OVC remains at the Lo level.
  • FIG. 6 (b) schematically shows a change in the above signal when the process proceeds to S405 in the process of FIG. 5 (a). Since the overcurrent flows through the IACC after the power supply control signal CNT_VACC1 is set to Hi in S402, the overcurrent detection signal DET_OVC changes to the Hi level and notifies the camera control circuit 101. Upon receiving the notification of the overcurrent detection signal DET_OVC, the camera control circuit 101 turns off the outputs of the accessory power supply circuits A131 and B132 as error processing to stop the power supply to the accessory 200. In this way, even when an overcurrent flows through the accessory power supply VACC, the camera control circuit 101 can detect the overcurrent and safely stop the system.
  • the accessory power supply VACC has a voltage of 3.3 V
  • the camera microcomputer power supply VMCU_C and the accessory microcomputer power supply VMCU_A have a voltage of 1.8 V. Therefore, if a voltage of 3.3 V is applied to an electric element operating at a voltage of 1.8 V, there is a concern that the electric element may be damaged. Further, since the behavior after the short circuit depends on the characteristics of the electric element, the camera control circuit 101 may not always be able to detect the short circuit between the terminals.
  • the I2C communication signal is at the Hi level in the communication standby state, even if it is short-circuited with a 3.3V voltage having a signal voltage of 1.8V or more, an abnormality cannot be detected depending on the characteristics of the connected electric element. In some cases.
  • the GND contacts TC04 and TA04 are arranged on one of the two sides of the accessory power supply VACC contacts TC05 and TA05, and the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET contacts TC06 and TA06 are arranged on the other side.
  • the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET is connected to the GND in the accessory 200. Therefore, even if a short circuit occurs between the contacts, the overcurrent can be detected and the system can be safely stopped without applying 3.3V to the element operating at 1.8V.
  • the accessory power supply VACC is supplied when the GND contact is not connected, the reference potential of the accessory 200 becomes unstable, and as a result, each circuit and the electric element may be damaged. be.
  • an external force may be applied that makes the contact of the connector terminals unstable.
  • the accessory power supply VACC contact and the GND contact adjacent to each other as in the present embodiment, only the accessory power supply VACC contact is relatively located, rather than arranging the accessory power supply VACC contact and the GND contact at separate terminals. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to be connected.
  • the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET is GND-connected in the accessory 200, but as in the accessory 200 shown in FIG. 9, the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET may be GND-connected via the resistance element Rd231. The short-circuit current can be reduced by connecting to GND via the resistor Rd231.
  • the voltage (Rd / (Rp + Rd)) ⁇ 1.8V obtained by dividing the voltage of 1.8V of the camera microcomputer power supply VMCU_C by the resistance element Rp134 and the resistance element Rd231 is the Lo level threshold (Vil) of the camera control circuit 101. It is necessary to select a resistance element Rd231 having a resistance value that satisfies the above. For example, when the Low level detection threshold value (Vil) of the camera control circuit 101 is 0.33 times the power supply voltage, the resistance value of the resistance element Rd231 needs to be 1/2 or less of the resistance element Rp134 (10 k ⁇ ). .. In the example of FIG. 9, the resistance value of the resistance element Rd231 is set to 5 k ⁇ .
  • FIG. 5B shows a process executed by the camera control circuit 101 when the accessory 200 having the configuration shown in FIG. 9 is attached to the camera 100. Since S411 to S413 are the same as S401 to S403 shown in FIG. 5A, the description thereof will be omitted.
  • the camera control circuit 101 monitors the signal level of the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET, and the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET contacts TC06 and TA06 are short-circuited with the accessory power supply VACC contacts TC05 and TA05. Judge whether or not. If the signal level is Lo, the camera control circuit 101 proceeds to S415 as if it is not short-circuited, and if the signal level is Hi, it proceeds to S416 as if it is short-circuited and performs error processing.
  • FIG. 6C schematically shows the state of the above signal when the accessory power supply VACC and the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET are short-circuited in the accessory 200 having the configuration of FIG. 9 to which the resistance element Rd231 (5 k ⁇ ) is added. ing. After the power supply control signal CNT_VACC1 is set to Hi in S402, an overcurrent does not flow in the IACC because the current is limited by the resistance element Rd231.
  • the voltage of the accessory power supply VACC is applied to the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET.
  • the camera control circuit 101 sets the power control signal CNT_VACC1 to Lo as error processing and outputs the accessory power supply VACC (power supply to the accessory 200). Stop it. As a result, the system can be safely stopped without continuously applying 3.3V to the terminals of the element operating at 1.8V.
  • the accessory 200 is controlled so that the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET becomes Lo level (GND potential) by the accessory control circuit 201 via an NPN transistor 212 as a switch means. May be.
  • the camera control circuit 101 can always detect the accessory 200.
  • the accessory control circuit 201 can detect the accessory 200 at an arbitrary timing. It is possible to notify the attachment to the camera.
  • the accessory 200 may be configured by connecting the resistance element Rd231 in series with the NPN transistor 212.
  • the resistance value needs to be 1/2 or less of the resistance element Rp134 (10 k ⁇ ) as in the configuration of FIG.
  • the safety of the system including the camera 100 and the accessory 200 can be maintained, and damage to them can be suppressed. ..
  • FIG. 7 shows an example of the functions of the FNC1 signal to the FNC4 signal as the functional signals connected to the contacts TC14 to TC17 and the contacts TA14 to TA17 for each type of the accessory 200 (here, the microphone device and the strobe device). ..
  • the FNC2 signal to the FNC4 signal are used as a digital audio (I2S: Inter-IC Sound standard) data bus to transfer audio data.
  • FIG. 8A shows a configuration example of the functional circuit 206 when the accessory 200 is a microphone device.
  • the voice processing circuit 206A1 in the function circuit 206 is a codec circuit that converts a voice signal input from the microphone 206A2 into a digital voice (I2S) data format, and is controlled by the accessory control circuit 201.
  • the accessory control circuit 201 can set the sampling frequency and the resolution by controlling the voice processing circuit 206A1. In this embodiment, the sampling frequency is 48 kHz and the resolution is 32 bits.
  • the microphone 206A2 is, for example, a MEMS-IC microphone or an electret condenser microphone.
  • TA14 is an FNC1 signal that is not used as an I2S data bus and is connected to GND.
  • the unused functional signal is connected to GND, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other than the GND potential (0V) such as the power potential and the L level (low potential) or H level (high potential) of the signal. It may be connected to a reference potential which is a stable potential.
  • the FNC2 signal connected to the TA15 is an audio data signal (DATA), which is a signal output from the accessory 200 to the camera 100.
  • DATA audio data signal
  • the FNC3 signal connected to the TA16 is an audio channel clock signal (LRCLK), which is a signal output from the accessory 200 to the camera 100.
  • LRCLK audio channel clock signal
  • the FNC4 signal connected to the TA17 is an audio bit clock signal (BCLK), which is a signal output from the camera 100 to the accessory 200.
  • BCLK audio bit clock signal
  • the sampling frequency is 48 kHz and the resolution is 32 bits as described above
  • the LRCLK frequency is 48 kHz and the BCLK frequency is 3.072 MHz.
  • the maximum frequency of DATA is 1.536 MHz, which is 1/2 cycle of CLK.
  • the contact potential is connected to the GND potential, which is the reference potential, next to the contacts TA17 and TC17 to which the FNC4 signal (BCLK) having the highest frequency is connected among the functional signal contacts to which the functional signal is connected.
  • Reference potential contacts TA18 and TC18 are arranged.
  • the signal wiring to the access interface is generally configured using a flexible substrate. Further, in order to reduce the product cost, the flexible board may have a single-sided specification, and the board wiring is performed in the same arrangement as the contact arrangement.
  • the GND contact which is a reference potential contact, is arranged next to the functional signal contact to which the signal having the highest frequency among the functional signals is connected. This makes it possible to suppress radiation noise (EMI) from the functional signal contact, interference with signals connected to other contacts, and crosstalk with signals other than the I2S data bus.
  • EMI radiation noise
  • the contacts TA17 and TC18 next to the contacts TA17 and TC17 to which the FNC4 signal (BCLK) having the highest frequency is connected are connected to the GND potential which is the reference potential, but the present invention is not limited to GND. The same effect can be obtained even if the connection is made to a stable reference potential other than the potential.
  • FIG. 8B is an example showing a configuration in which voice data is increased with respect to FIG. 8A.
  • the purpose of increasing audio data is to increase the number of channels and resolution.
  • the FNC4 signal connected to the TA17 is an audio bit clock signal (BCLK), which is the same as in FIG. 8A.
  • the FNC3 signal connected to the TA14 is an audio channel clock signal (LRCLK), which is a signal output from the accessory 200 to the camera 100.
  • LRCLK audio channel clock signal
  • the FNC2 signal connected to the TA15 is an audio data signal (DATA2), which is a signal output from the accessory 200 to the camera 100.
  • DATA2 audio data signal
  • the FNC1 signal connected to the TA16 operates as a voice data signal (DATA2) as a signal output from the accessory 200 to the camera 100.
  • DATA2 voice data signal
  • the signals with the highest frequency are arranged closer to the GND terminal in order, so that they are relatively relative.
  • the configuration can be highly effective in preventing crosstalk.
  • FIG. 8C shows a configuration example of the functional circuit 206 when the accessory 200 is a strobe device.
  • the light emitting circuit 206B1 in the functional circuit 206 is a strobe light emitting circuit composed of an IGBT, a trigger coil, and the like, and controls light emission of the light emitting unit 206B2.
  • the light emitting unit 206B2 is composed of a xenon tube or the like and emits illumination light to irradiate the subject.
  • the charging circuit 206B3 is composed of a transformer, a switching FET, a capacitor, and the like, and accumulates electric charges for causing the light emitting unit 206B2 to emit light.
  • the FNC1 signal connected to the TA14 is a light emission synchronization signal (STARTX) for controlling the light emission timing of the light emitting unit 206B2, and is a signal output from the camera 100 to the accessory 200.
  • the FNC2 signal to FNC4 signal are not used in the strobe device, and no signal is connected to these contacts.
  • the unused functional signal contacts are not connected (OPEN), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the power potential and the L level of the signal are adjusted according to the contacts TC15 to TC17 to which the contacts TA15 to TA17 are connected. Alternatively, it may be connected to a stable reference potential such as H level.
  • the strobe device only the FNC1 signal is used among the functional signals. Further, although the light emission synchronization signal (STARTX) is not a signal generated periodically, the camera 100 allocates GND to the FNC1 signal when the microphone device is connected so that the configuration of the camera control circuit 101 is not complicated. Can be done.
  • the light emission synchronization signal (STARTX) is not a signal generated periodically, the camera 100 allocates GND to the FNC1 signal when the microphone device is connected so that the configuration of the camera control circuit 101 is not complicated. Can be done.
  • the SDA (first signal) connected to the contacts TC12 and TA12 as the first signal contact and the SCL (second signal) connected to the contacts TC13 and TA13 as the second signal contact are both I2C communication. It is a signal for. These signals are transmitted by open drain communication. Since both SDA and SCL are pulled up to the camera microcomputer power supply VMCU_C, the signal has a relatively high impedance during communication standby, and is easily affected by crosstalk.
  • the communication request signal (fourth signal) / WAKE is assigned to the contacts TC11 and TA11 as the fourth signal contacts next to the SDA contacts TC12 and TA12.
  • the communication request signal / WAKE is a signal for making a communication request from the accessory 200 to the camera 100.
  • FIG. 15A shows the timing at which the accessory 200 makes a communication request to the camera 100 and the I2C communication is performed.
  • the communication request signal / WAKE is Prior to I2C communication by SCL and SDA, the signal level changes from Hi level to Lo level. This is because I2C communication is performed in response to this change. Therefore, by arranging the communication request signal / WAKE contacts TC11 and TA11 adjacent to the SDA contact and the SDA contact for I2C communication, crosstalk to the communication request signal / WAKE SDA is prevented from occurring. Can be done.
  • the communication request signal / WAKE crosses the SDA by controlling the communication request signal / WAKE signal level to be changed from the Lo level to the Hi level after the I2C communication. It is possible to prevent talk from occurring.
  • the FNC1 signal is assigned to the contacts TC14 and TA14 as the third signal contact next to the SCL contacts TC13 and TA13. As described above, in the microphone device, since GND is assigned to the FNC1 signal, crosstalk to the SCL can be prevented from occurring.
  • FIG. 15B shows the timing at which the accessory 200 makes a communication request to the camera 100, and the I2C communication and the strobe light emission are performed. As shown in FIG. 15B, at the timing (period) when the light emission synchronization signal is output, I2C communication is not performed between the camera 100 and the accessory 200 in order to process the control of the strobe light emission with the highest priority.
  • the emission synchronization signal is a signal whose signal level changes before (or after) during I2C communication, but the signal level does not change during I2C communication. This makes it possible to prevent crosstalk of the emission synchronization signal with respect to SCL.
  • good I2C communication is enabled by arranging the STARTX contact on one of the sides of the SDA contact and the SCL contact and arranging the / WAKE contact on the other.
  • the communication request signal / WAKE connected to the contacts TC11 and TA11 adjacent to the SDA contacts TC12 and TA12 is an open drain type signal like the SDA. Compared with the case where the communication request signal / WAKE is a push-pull system, it is possible to suppress crosstalk to the SDA when the signal level of the communication request signal / WAKE changes.
  • the SCLK connected to the SCLK contacts TC07 and TA07 is a clock signal for SPI communication, and operates at a drive frequency of 1 MHz in this embodiment.
  • the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 next to the SCLK contacts TC07 and TA07 are used for transmitting the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET.
  • the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET is a signal that becomes a potential equivalent to GND when the accessory 200 is mounted on the camera 100. Therefore, by adopting such a contact arrangement, it is possible to prevent crosstalk between SCLK and signals other than the SPI bus.
  • the MOSI connected to the contacts TC08 and TA08 next to the SCLK contacts TC07 and TA07 is a data signal transmitted from the camera control circuit 101 to the accessory control circuit 201 by SPI communication.
  • the timing at which the MOSI output level in SPI communication changes is synchronized with the timing at which the SCLK output level changes. Therefore, by arranging the MOSI contacts TC08 and TA08 next to the SCLK contacts TC07 and TA07, crosstalk between SCLK and MOSI can be suppressed.
  • the MISO connected to the contacts TC09 and TA09 next to the MOSI contacts TC08 and TA08 is a data signal transmitted from the accessory control circuit 201 to the camera control circuit 101 in SPI communication.
  • the timing at which the output level of MISO changes in SPI communication is synchronized with the timing at which the output level of SCLK changes, similar to MOSI. Therefore, by arranging the MISO contacts TC09 and TA09 next to the MOSI contacts TC08 and TA08, crosstalk between the MOSI and the MISO can be suppressed.
  • the CS connected to the contacts TC10 and TA10 next to the MISO contacts TC09 and TA09 is a communication request signal transmitted from the camera control circuit 101 to the accessory control circuit 201 in SPI communication.
  • CS in SPI communication maintains a constant output level from the time when a communication request is made to the time when communication is completed. Therefore, by arranging the CS contacts TC10 and TA10 next to the MISO contacts TC09 and TA09, crosstalk to the MISO can be suppressed.
  • the communication request signal / WAKE connected to the contacts TC11 and TA11 adjacent to the CS contacts TC10 and TA10 is a signal for making a communication request from the accessory control circuit 201 to the camera control circuit 101.
  • the communication request signal / WAKE is an open drain type signal, it is a signal that is relatively susceptible to crosstalk. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the CS contacts TC10 and TA10, whose signal level changes relatively infrequently, are placed adjacent to the communication request signal / WAKE contacts TC11 and TA11 to crosstalk the communication request signal / WAKE. Can be suppressed.
  • both end sides A differential signal that requires impedance control is connected.
  • the signal wiring to the access interface is generally configured using a flexible substrate. In order to achieve the desired wiring impedance on a flexible board, it is necessary to keep the distance between the lines of the differential signal and the GND to be wired in parallel, and in the board using both sides, the differential signal It is common to form a mesh-like GND wiring on the back side. As described above, the signal wiring that requires impedance control has relatively large restrictions on the wiring design as compared with a general single-ended signal.
  • the differential signal that requires impedance control is connected to the contacts located on both ends of the camera connection portion 141 and the accessory connection portion 211, so that the differential signal is relatively related to other signals. It is lowered to increase the degree of freedom in wiring design.
  • the differential signal can be transferred at a high speed of about several hundred Mbps to several Gbps such as USB and PCIe, and is suitable for transferring a large amount of data between devices.
  • the differential signal may not be used depending on the type of accessory 200. In such an accessory that does not use a differential signal, the contact assigned to the differential signal is unnecessary, so it is possible to reduce the cost of the accessory by deleting the contact.
  • FIG. 12 shows an example in which the configuration of the accessory 200 shown in FIG. 1 is changed. Specifically, it has a configuration in which contacts TA01 to TA03 and TA19 to TA21 and signals and circuits connected to them are omitted. That is, the accessory 200 of FIG. 12 has 15 contacts.
  • differential signals are assigned to the contacts TC01 to TC03 and TC19 to TC21 located on both ends of the camera connection portion 141.
  • the contact for the differential signal in the accessory connection portion 211 is eliminated, and a contact arrangement including only the contact required for the accessory 200 is adopted.
  • the contacts TC04 and TA04 and the contacts TC18 and TA18 near both ends of the camera connection portion 141 and the accessory connection portion 211 are used as GND contacts.
  • the contacts at both ends of the accessory connection portion 211 can be made into GND contacts.
  • the configuration of the camera 100 and the accessory 200 is as described above.
  • the intermediate accessory 300 includes an extension cable for extending the distance between the camera 100 and the accessory 200, an adapter for simultaneously attaching a plurality of accessories to the camera 100, and the like.
  • the case where the intermediate accessory 300 is an extension cable will be described.
  • the intermediate accessory 300 corresponds to an accessory
  • the accessory 200 corresponds to another accessory.
  • the intermediate accessory 300 has a camera shoe and an accessory shoe that can be attached to the camera 100 and the accessory 200, respectively, and each of the intermediate accessory 300 is provided with a camera-side intermediate connection portion 311 and an accessory-side intermediate connection portion 312.
  • the camera-side intermediate connection portion 311 has 21 contacts TM01 to TM21 arranged in a row, and is a connector for making an electrical connection with the camera 100.
  • the contacts TM01 to TM21 each make one-to-one contact with the contacts TC01 to TC21 at the camera connection portion 141.
  • the accessory-side intermediate connection portion 312 has 21 contacts TN01 to TN21 arranged in a row, and is a connector for making an electrical connection with the accessory 200.
  • the contacts TN01 to TN21 are in one-to-one contact with the contacts TA01 to TA21 in the accessory connection portion 211, respectively.
  • the intermediate accessory 300 may receive the power supply from the camera 100, or the power supply from the camera 100 may be transmitted to the accessory 200 as it is.
  • the power supply in the present embodiment includes a case where the power supply from the camera 100 is transmitted to the accessory 200 as it is, and the power supply is not supplied to the accessory 300.
  • the number of contacts of the camera-side intermediate connection unit 311 is the same as the number of contacts of the camera connection unit 141
  • the number of contacts of the accessory-side intermediate connection unit 312 is the same as the number of contacts of the accessory connection unit 211. It is not always necessary to have the same number of each.
  • FIG. 14 shows an example in which the configurations of the accessory 200 and the intermediate accessory 300 are changed from the configuration of FIG.
  • differential signals are connected to the contacts TC01 to TC03 and TC19 to TC21 on both ends of the camera connection portion 141, the differential signal may not be required depending on the function of the accessory 200.
  • the contact points to which the differential signal is connected from the camera side intermediate connection portion 311 and the accessory side intermediate connection portion 312 and the accessory connection portion 211 are eliminated. That is, the intermediate accessory 300 and the accessory 200 in FIG. 14 each have 15 contacts. As a result, a contact arrangement including only the contacts required for the intermediate accessory 300 and the accessory 200 is adopted.
  • connection structure between the camera 100 and the external flash unit 120 which is an example of the accessory 200, will be described in detail.
  • FIG. 16A shows the camera 100 viewed from the diagonally rear side.
  • FIG. 16B shows a method of attaching the external flash unit 120 to the accessory shoe 1123 of the camera 100.
  • FIG. 16C shows a state in which the external flash unit 120 is attached to the camera 100 when viewed from the oblique rear side.
  • the imaging optical system is provided on the front side (field side) of the camera 100, and the image display unit 107 is provided on the back side of the camera 100.
  • a top cover 150 as an exterior member is provided on the upper surface of the camera 100, and an accessory shoe 1123 is arranged with respect to the top cover 150.
  • the camera connection portion 206 is provided at the bottom of the external flash unit 120.
  • the external flash unit 120 is slid parallel to the front side in the Z direction (mounting side in the first direction) with respect to the camera 100 to engage the camera connection portion 206 and the accessory shoe 1123. Let me. As a result, the external flash unit 120 can be attached to the camera 100.
  • the front side in the Z direction is a direction from the back side to the front side of the camera 100, that is, a direction from the image display unit 107 side toward the imaging optical system 122 side.
  • the X direction (second direction), the Y direction (third direction), and the Z direction (front-back direction) shown in the drawings after FIG. 16 are common.
  • the X direction is a direction orthogonal to the Z direction in the horizontal plane when the Z direction is parallel to the horizontal direction, and is the width direction of the camera 100.
  • the Y direction is a direction orthogonal to the Z direction and the X direction, and is the height direction of the camera 100.
  • FIG. 17A shows the top cover 150 and the disassembled accessory shoe 1123.
  • FIG. 17B shows the assembled accessory shoe 1123.
  • the assembly direction of the accessory shoe 1123 with respect to the top cover 150 is the Y direction.
  • the accessory shoe 1123 has an engaging member 151, a connection terminal connector 152, a shoe stage 153, and an accessory shoe spring 154.
  • the engaging member 151 is a member for holding the external flash unit 120 by engaging with the external flash unit 120.
  • the connection terminal connector 152 includes a plurality of connection terminals 152a arranged on the connector base member 152e as a holding member made of a resin material or the like at equal pitches in the X direction and held by the connector base member 152e. ..
  • the connection terminal 152a corresponds to the contacts TC01 to TC21 of the camera connection portion 141 shown in FIG.
  • connection terminal connector 152 In the connection terminal connector 152, the connection terminal 152a is arranged in the Z direction (front side of the camera 100), which is the mounting direction of the external flash unit 120, as shown in FIG. 17 (b).
  • An engagement hole 156 that engages with the lock pin 252 of the external flash unit 120 shown in FIG. 19A is provided behind the connection terminal connector 152 in the Z direction (on the back side of the digital camera 100).
  • connection terminal 152a is electrically connected to the external flash unit 120. Further, each of the plurality of connection terminals 152a is electrically connected to the flexible substrate 158 arranged on the lower side of the top cover 150 in the Y direction.
  • the flexible substrate 158 is connected to a main substrate (not shown) of the camera 100. Therefore, when the external flash unit 120 is attached to the accessory shoe 1123, communication between the external flash unit 120 and the camera 100 becomes possible.
  • the shoe stage 153 is a housing member that surrounds the engaging member 151 and the connection terminal connector 152.
  • the accessory shoe holding member 155 is a structural skeleton that holds the engaging member 151. As shown in FIG. 17A, the accessory shoe holding member 155, the flexible substrate 158, the top cover 150, the shoe stage 153, and the connection terminal connector 152 are fastened to the engaging member 151 by four screws 157 for inserting them. Will be done. As a result, these members are positioned and fixed to each other. By arranging four screws 157 one by one in four regions equally divided in the X direction and the Z direction, the members can be connected in a well-balanced manner.
  • FIG. 18A shows the structure on the upper surface side of the engaging member 151
  • FIG. 18B shows the structure on the lower surface side of the engaging member 151
  • FIG. 18C shows the structure of the connection terminal connector 152 on the upper surface side
  • FIG. 24 shows the accessory shoe 1123 as viewed from the insertion direction of the external flash unit 120.
  • the engaging member 151 is formed by bending a metal plate in a loop shape so that the end faces of the bent end faces face each other at the seam 151a and come into contact with each other.
  • the engaging member 151 has a pair of engaging portions 151b and a connecting portion 151c that connects the pair of engaging portions 151b to each other.
  • the engaging member 151 is formed with a pair of first screw hole portions 151d used for fastening the screw 157 and a pair of second screw hole portions 151e. Further, the engaging member 151 is formed with an engaging hole portion 156 that engages with the lock pin 252 of the external flash unit 120.
  • the pair of engaging portions 151b are separated by a first width (hereinafter, referred to as engagement portion spacing) 151aa in the X direction.
  • the holding member 254 of the external flash unit 120 which will be described later, shown in FIG. 19B is inserted into the engaging portion interval 151aa.
  • the pair of first screw hole portions 151d are provided at predetermined intervals in the X direction, and the pair of first fastenings provided apart from each other in the X direction at the rear (rear side) in the Z direction. Functions as a hole.
  • the pair of second screw hole portions 151e are provided at predetermined intervals in the X direction, and function as a pair of second fastening hole portions provided apart from each other in the X direction in the front in the Z direction. do.
  • the engagement hole portion 156 is formed at a position capable of engaging with the lock pin 252 of the external flash unit 120 in the region sandwiched between the pair of first screw hole portions 151d.
  • connection terminal connector 152 As shown in FIGS. 17B and 18C, a plurality of connection terminals 152a are exposed.
  • the position of the camera connecting portion 206 is determined by the engaging portion spacing 151aa of the engaging member 151. Therefore, the holding member 254 of the external flash unit 120 is positioned with respect to the connection terminal connector 152 by the engaging member 151.
  • FIG. 24 shows on both sides of the connection terminal connector 152 (connector base member 152e), which is an example of the camera connection portion 141 shown in FIG. 1, with a plurality of connection terminals 152a sandwiched in the X direction on the front side in the Z direction.
  • a contact surface and a groove are formed. That is, an abutting surface 152b that abuts and positions the accessory shoe 1123 in the Z direction when the external flash unit 120 is mounted, and a groove portion 152c into which the accessory shoe 1123 is inserted are formed.
  • Each groove portion 152c is formed so as to extend from the contact surface 152b to the front side (mounting side) in the Z direction, and is a slope formed so as to face inward and diagonally upward (inclination with respect to the X direction).
  • a portion 152d is provided. The portion of the groove portion 152c above the slope portion 152d extends outward in the X direction from the position of the upper end of the slope portion 152d. This is to prevent a dent (sink) from being generated in the slope portion 152d during resin molding when the slope portion 152d is formed up to the upper end of the groove portion 152c.
  • the outermost inner surface 152cc of the groove portion 152c in the connector base member 152e of the accessory shoe 1123 is the inner end surface of the pair of engaging portions 151b of the engaging member 151 (engaging portion spacing 151aa). It is provided on the outer side and inside the outermost inner surface 151bb of the engaging member 151.
  • the slope start position 152cc which is the end (lower end) of the slope portion 152d on the bottom surface side of the groove portion 152c, is provided inside the engagement portion spacing 151aa.
  • the slope shape starting from the slope start position 152 cc the space into which the shoe device (camera connection portion 206 described later) of the external flash unit 120 is inserted can be expanded, and the degree of freedom in the shape of the shoe device can be secured. It becomes possible.
  • the shoe device of the external flash unit 120 can be sufficiently formed with a shape that protects the connection terminals.
  • FIG. 19A shows the external flash unit 120 as viewed from the camera connection portion 206 side (lower side in the Y direction).
  • FIG. 19B shows the cut surface along the line AA in FIG. 19A and shows the internal structure of the camera connection portion 206.
  • FIG. 20A shows the camera connection portion 206. However, the illustration of the base portion 250 and the lock lever 253, which will be described later, is omitted.
  • FIG. 20B shows the camera connection portion 206 viewed from the front in the Z direction.
  • the camera connecting portion 206 When the camera connecting portion 206 is attached to the accessory shoe 1123 of the camera 100, as shown in FIG. 19B, the camera connecting portion 206 is on the lower side in the Y direction of the base portion 250 of the external flash unit 120 (upper side in FIG. 19A). ).
  • the camera connecting portion 206 has a shoe mounting leg (engaging member, shoe plate) 251, a lock pin 252, a lock lever 253, a holding member 254, a connecting plug 256, and a Y-direction holding member 258.
  • the shoe mounting leg 251 is an engaging member that engages and holds the external flash unit 120 with the accessory shoe 1123 of the camera 100. That is, the shoe mounting leg 251 is an engaging member on the external flash unit 120 side that can be attached to and detached from the engaging member 151 of the accessory shoe 1123.
  • the shoe mounting leg 251 is manufactured by processing a metal plate (sheet metal) in order to secure high mechanical strength against such a large stress.
  • the lock pin 252 is a member for preventing the external flash unit 120 from falling off when the camera connecting portion 206 (shoe mounting leg 251) is mounted on the accessory shoe 1123, and the shoe mounting leg 251 is movable in the Y direction. It is held in. Specifically, the lock pin 252 is slidably held in the Y direction by the Y direction holding member 258. The lock lever 253 and the Y-direction holding member 258 are held by the holding member 254.
  • the Y-direction holding member 258 is moved downward in the Y-direction in FIG. 19B by a cam portion (not shown).
  • the lock pin 252 also moves downward in the Y direction in FIG. 19B together with the holding member 258 in the Y direction.
  • the lock pin 252 protrudes from the shoe mounting leg 251 and engages with the engaging hole portion 156 provided in the engaging member 151 of the accessory shoe 1123.
  • the lock pin 252 and the engagement hole 156 function as a positioning member in the Z direction for ensuring an electrical connection between the external flash unit 120 and the camera 100.
  • connection plug 256 which is an example of the accessory connection portion 211 shown in FIG. 1, is provided on the front side in the Z direction of the camera connection portion 206, is formed of a non-conductive material (dielectric material) such as a resin material, and is a holding member. It is integrated with 254.
  • the outermost width T of the connection plug 256 in the X direction is narrower than the width W of the shoe mounting leg 251 in the X direction. As a result, an area for providing the contact portion 251b on the shoe mounting leg 251 is secured.
  • the connection plug 256 has a plurality of connection terminals 257 for contacting and communicating with the plurality of connection terminals 152a of the accessory shoe 1123 shown in FIG. 18 (c).
  • the connection terminal 257 corresponds to the contacts TA01 to TA21 of the accessory connection portion 211 shown in FIG.
  • connection terminals 257 are provided so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of connection terminals 152a, and are held by the holding member 254 so as to extend in the Z direction and to line up in the X direction.
  • Each connection terminal 257 has a tip portion 257a that comes into contact with the corresponding connection terminal 152a. Further, each connection terminal 257 has a shape extending rearward in the Z direction from the tip portion 257a, and when the tip portion 257a abuts on the connection terminal 152a, the tip portion 257a is elastically deformed to the upper side in the Y direction in FIG. 19 (b). It has an extension portion 257b that is displaced to.
  • an extension portion 257c extending upward in the Y direction is formed.
  • a flexible substrate connecting portion 257d which is connected to the main substrate (not shown) of the external flash unit 120 and connected to the flexible substrate 259 inserted into the holding member 254 from the upper side in the Y direction is provided. ing.
  • the extension portion 257b is formed with a step portion 257e having a step in the Y direction in the middle of the Z direction.
  • the stretched portion 257b can be elastically deformed in the Y direction.
  • the durability is lowered because a sufficient amount of deformation cannot be obtained, and as a result, the connection terminal 152a and the tip portion 257a are repeatedly attached and detached.
  • the stretched portion 257b may be easily damaged. Therefore, by providing the stepped portion 257e on the extending portion 257b, a sufficient distance L is secured without causing the extending portion 257b to interfere with the shoe mounting leg 251.
  • connection plugs 256 projecting downward (third direction) in the Y direction so as to sandwich a plurality of connection terminals 257 at both ends in the X direction.
  • a protrusion 256a is provided.
  • the lower tip portion 256d of each protrusion 256a is a line connecting the lower ends of the tip portion 257a of the connection terminal 257 in order to protect the connection terminal 257 from external forces such as pressure and impact. It protrudes below. That is, the tip portion 257a of the connection terminal 257 is provided above (inside) the line connecting the lower tip portions 256d of the pair of protrusions 256a.
  • a slope portion 256b is provided as an outer surface that extends diagonally upward from the lower tip portion 256d and faces diagonally downward, that is, has an inclination with respect to the X direction. Has been done. Since each protrusion 256a has such a shape, the connection plug 256 can be inserted into the groove portion 152c having the slope portion 152d in the connection terminal connector 152.
  • the slope portion 256b has a role of releasing external forces such as pressure and impact on the connection plug 256 to prevent the connection plug from being damaged.
  • FIG. 20C shows a case where an external force is applied to the connection plug 256 from the X direction.
  • FIG. 20 (c) shows the connection plug 256 seen from the front in the Z direction.
  • F 1 be the external force from the X direction and define it as a vector.
  • the external force F 1 acting on the slope portion 256b is decomposed according to the rules of addition in the vector space, it is decomposed into a component force F 2 in the direction along the slope portion 256b and a component force F 3 in the direction perpendicular to the slope portion 256b. ..
  • the component force F 2 and the component force F 3 can be obtained by the following equation (1).
  • F 2 F 1 cos ⁇
  • F 3 F 1 sin ⁇ (1)
  • 0 ° ⁇ ⁇ 90 °.
  • FIG. 25 shows an enlarged part of the connection plug 256 seen from the Z direction.
  • the height from the lower tip portion 256d of the protrusion 256a to the upper surface of the connection plug 256 is B, and from the lower tip portion 256d (slope start position 256c) to the slope portion.
  • A be the height of the slope portion 256b to the upper end of 256b.
  • A is preferably 1/5 or more of B, and more preferably 1/4 or more, 1/3 or more, or half or more as shown in FIG.
  • the slope portion 256b is formed to have a significant dimension for the function of releasing an external force from the X direction, and is generally different from the chamfered shape provided at the corner of the protrusion. Further, the inclination angle ⁇ of the slope portion 256b with respect to the X direction is preferably set in the range of 45 ° ⁇ 20 ° for the above-mentioned function of releasing the external force.
  • the slope start position at the lower tip portion 256d of the slope portions 256b on both sides is desirable to make the width between 256c in the X direction as short as possible.
  • the width of the slope start position 256c in the X direction is provided inside the width V of the holding member 254 in the X direction, so that the region of the contact portion 251b is sufficiently secured.
  • the camera connecting portion 206 has a structure in which the shoe mounting leg 251 and the holding member 254 are fastened. The details of this fastening structure will be described later.
  • the holding member 254 can be inserted into the engaging portion spacing 151aa of the engaging member 151 of the accessory shoe 1123 shown in FIG. 18A, and has a width V shorter than the width W of the shoe mounting leg 251 in the X direction. It has a part 254a.
  • the width W and width V are defined by Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) B7101-1975 "Camera accessory mounting seat and mounting foot”.
  • the contact portion 251b of the shoe mounting leg 251 comes into contact with the contact surface 152b on the front side in the Z direction of the connection terminal connector 152, so that the position of the external flash unit 120 with respect to the camera 100 is determined in the Z direction.
  • the holding member 254 is also a structure for connecting the shoe mounting leg 251 and the base portion 250, and the lock pin 252 and the connecting terminal 257 are arranged inside the connecting portion 254a.
  • FIG. 21 (a) shows the camera connection portion 206 seen from the upper side in the Y direction
  • FIG. 21 (b) shows the cut surface along the line BB in FIG. 21 (a).
  • a pair of first screw 260a and a pair of second screws 260b which are fastening members for fastening the shoe mounting leg 251 to the holding member 254, penetrate the holding member 254 and are fastened to the shoe mounting leg 251.
  • the shoe mounting leg 251 is stably held by the holding member 254.
  • the shoe mounting leg 251 is a component on which a large stress acts. Therefore, the required mechanical strength is ensured by fastening the metal shoe mounting legs 251 to the holding member 254 with a pair of first screws 260a and a pair of second screws 260b arranged in a well-balanced manner. It will be possible.
  • connection terminals 257 are arranged in the region S sandwiched between the pair of first screws 260a and the pair of second screws 260b.
  • the width between the pair of first screws 260a and the pair of second screws 260b is the width between the lower tip portion 256d of the protrusion 256a of the connection plug 256, the width V of the holding member 254, and the connection plug. It is narrower than the outermost width T of 256 and the width W of the shoe mounting leg 251.
  • FIG. 26 shows a cross section of the accessory shoe 1123 with the camera connection portion 206 attached, as viewed from the Z direction. This figure shows the dimensions T and V of the camera connecting portion 206 and the positional relationship between each portion of the camera connecting portion 206 and each portion of the accessory shoe 1123.
  • the upper surface of the shoe fitting portion 251a of the camera connecting portion 206 is in contact with the lower surface (ceiling surface) of the engaging member 151 of the accessory shoe 1123 for positioning in the Y direction.
  • the lower tip portion 256d and the slope portion 256b of the protrusion 256a of the connection plug 256 in the camera connecting portion 206 do not abut on the bottom surface and the slope portion 152d of the groove portion 152c of the accessory shoe 1123, respectively.
  • the gap between the lower tip portion 256d of the protrusion 256a and the bottom surface of the groove portion 152c of the accessory shoe 1123 is set to be as small as possible.
  • the gap between the slope portions 256b and 152d and the gap between the inner end surface 152cc of the groove portion 152c and the outer end surface of the connection plug 256 are set to be large to some extent. As a result, when an external force in the X direction is applied to the external flash unit 120, the connection terminals 257 and 152a can be prevented from being loaded.
  • the relationship between the height of the groove portion 152c in the Y direction (the height from the bottom surface of the groove portion 152c to the ceiling surface of the engaging member 151) and the height of the slope portion 152d in the Y direction. Is the same as the relationship between the height B of the connection plug 256 and the height A of the slope portion 256b in the camera connecting portion 206.
  • the inclination angle of the slope portion 256b with respect to the X direction is also set in the range of 45 ° ⁇ 20 °, similarly to the inclination angle ⁇ of the slope portion 256b in the camera connecting portion 206.
  • the slope portion 256b may be a curved surface having a curvature. That is, the slope portion 256b may be a surface having an inclination with respect to the X direction.
  • an area for providing a large number of connection terminals and a shape for protecting them and an area for positioning between parts are secured. be able to.
  • FIG. 22A shows the external flash unit 120 as viewed from the camera connection portion 206 side (lower side in the Y direction).
  • 22 (b) shows the cut surface along the line AA in FIG. 22 (a), and shows the internal structure of the camera connecting portion 206.
  • FIG. 23A shows the camera connection portion 206. However, the illustration of the base portion 250 and the lock lever 253 is omitted.
  • FIG. 23B shows the camera connection portion 206 viewed from the front in the Z direction.
  • the camera connecting portion 206 When the camera connecting portion 206 is attached to the accessory shoe 1123 of the camera 100, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), the camera connecting portion 206 is on the lower side in the Y direction of the base portion 250 of the external flash unit 120 (upper side in FIG. 22 (a)). ).
  • the camera connecting portion 206 has a shoe mounting leg 300a, a lock pin 252, a lock lever 253, a holding member 300, a connecting plug 300b, a Y-direction holding member 258, and a shoe cover 301.
  • the shoe mounting leg 300a is an engaging member for engaging the external flash unit 120 with the accessory shoe 1123 of the camera 100, similarly to the shoe mounting leg 251 of the embodiment described above. That is, the shoe mounting leg 300a is an engaging member on the external flash unit 120 side that can be attached to and detached from the engaging member 151 of the accessory shoe 1123.
  • the shoe mounting leg 251 which is a metal shoe plate and the resin holding member 254 are formed of separate members in order to give priority to mechanical strength.
  • the shoe mounting leg 300a and the holding member 300 are formed as an integral member by a resin material (non-conductive material).
  • the pair of first screws 260a and the pair of second screws 260b in the previous embodiment are not required, and the space for arranging the connection terminals 257 becomes wider. Therefore, a larger number of connection terminals 257 are arranged. can do.
  • the external flash unit 120 can communicate more information with the camera 100 via the camera connection portion 206 and the accessory shoe 1123.
  • connection plug 300b is provided on the front side in the Z direction of the camera connection portion 206, and is formed as an integral member with the holding member 300 formed of a non-conductive resin material in the present embodiment. Similar to the embodiment described above, the outermost width T of the connection plug 300b in the X direction is made narrower than the width W of the shoe mounting leg 300a in the X direction, so that the contact portion 300e is formed in the shoe mounting leg 300a. The area to be provided is secured.
  • the connection plug 300b has a plurality of connection terminals 257 for contacting and communicating with the plurality of connection terminals 152a of the accessory shoe 1123 shown in FIG. 18 (c).
  • the shoe cover 301 is an enclosure attached to the holding member 300, and is a member that protects a plurality of connection terminals 257.
  • the shape of the connection terminal 257 is the same as that of the previous embodiment, and a step portion 257e is provided to secure a sufficient distance L in the Z direction of the extension portion 257b without interfering with the shoe cover 301.
  • connection plug 300b is also the same as that of the connection plug 256 of the previous embodiment, and a pair of protrusions protruding downward in the Y direction so as to sandwich a plurality of connection terminals 257 at both ends of the connection plug 300b in the X direction. 300c is provided.
  • the lower tip portion 300k of each protrusion 300c is a line connecting the lower ends of the tip portion 257a of the connection terminal 257 in order to protect the connection terminal 257 from external forces such as pressure and impact. It protrudes below. That is, the tip portion 257a of the connection terminal 257 is provided above (inside) the line connecting the lower tip portions 300k of the pair of protrusions 300b.
  • a slope portion 300f extending diagonally upward from the lower tip portion 300k and facing diagonally downward side is provided on the outer side of each protrusion 300c in the X direction. Since each protrusion 300c has such a shape, the connection plug 300b can be inserted into the groove 152c having the slope portion 152d in the connection terminal connector 152 described in the previous embodiment. As described in the previous embodiment, the slope portion 300c has a role of releasing an external force such as pressure or impact on the connection plug 300b to prevent the connection plug from being damaged.
  • the slope start positions 300g on both sides are provided inside the width V of the holding member 254 in the X direction to sufficiently secure the region of the contact portion 300e of the shoe mounting legs 300a.
  • the holding member 300 is formed so that it can be inserted and engaged with the engaging portion spacing 151aa of the engaging member 151 shown in FIG. 18A, and has a width V shorter than the width W of the shoe mounting leg 300a in the X direction. It has a connecting portion 300h.
  • the width W and the width V are defined by the Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) B7101-1975 "Camera accessory mounting seat and mounting foot" as in the previous embodiment.
  • the holding member 300 is also a structure for connecting the shoe mounting legs 300a and the base portion 250, and the lock pin 252 and the connecting terminal 257 are arranged inside the connecting portion 300h.
  • the case where the camera 100, the accessory 200, and the intermediate accessory 300 have 21 or 15 contacts has been described, but the number of contacts may be other than these.
  • the microphone device and the strobe device have been described as the accessory 200, but the accessory referred to in the present invention includes various devices other than the microphone device such as the electronic viewfinder unit and the strobe device.
  • the camera has been described as an electronic device, but the electronic device referred to in the present invention also includes various electronic devices other than the camera.
  • the present invention supplies a program that realizes one or more functions of the above-described embodiment to a system or device via a network or storage medium, and one or more processors in the computer of the system or device reads and executes the program. It can also be realized by the processing to be performed. It can also be realized by a circuit (for example, ASIC) that realizes one or more functions.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Accessories Of Cameras (AREA)
  • Studio Devices (AREA)
  • Stroboscope Apparatuses (AREA)
  • Details Of Connecting Devices For Male And Female Coupling (AREA)
  • Structure And Mechanism Of Cameras (AREA)
  • Exposure Control For Cameras (AREA)

Abstract

[Problem] To reduce the occurrence of communication errors due to contact failure of some of terminals when attaching an accessory. [Solution] An electronic device (100) is configured so that an accessory (200) can be detachably attached thereto. The electronic device has a plurality of contacts (TC01-TC21) that are arranged in a line and are electrically connected to the accessory. The plurality of contacts include: an attachment detection contact (TC06) which is used in detecting attachment of the accessory to the electronic device; and a communication request contact (TC11) which is used in a communication request from the accessory to the electronic device. The attachment detection contact and the communication request contact are disposed between the contact farthest to one end side and the contact farthest to the other end side in the arrangement direction of the plurality of contacts, and the attachment detection contact is disposed between the communication request contact and the contact farthest to the one end side. In the contact arrangement direction, the distance between the attachment detection contact and the communication request contact is shorter than the distance between the communication request contact and the contact farthest to the other end side.

Description

電子機器およびアクセサリElectronics and accessories
 本発明は、通信や装着検出等に用いられる接点を有する電子機器およびアクセサリに関する。 The present invention relates to electronic devices and accessories having contacts used for communication, mounting detection, and the like.
 カメラ等の電子機器に設けられたアクセサリシューには、照明機器等のアクセサリが装着される。アクセサリシューには、特許文献1に開示されているように、カメラへのアクセサリの装着を検出したりカメラとアクセサリ間の通信を行ったりするための複数の接点(端子)が設けられる。 Accessories such as lighting equipment are attached to the accessory shoes provided in electronic devices such as cameras. As disclosed in Patent Document 1, the accessory shoe is provided with a plurality of contacts (terminals) for detecting the attachment of the accessory to the camera and for communicating between the camera and the accessory.
特開2013-34172号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-34172
 しかしながら、電子機器とアクセサリの動作中にこれらの接点の接触が離れると、誤動作の原因となる。特に、電子機器へのアクセサリの装着を検出するための接点が接触したにもかかわらず電子機器とアクセサリ間の通信用の接点の接触が離れたままだと、通信エラーとなる。 However, if these contacts are separated from each other during the operation of the electronic device and the accessory, it may cause a malfunction. In particular, if the contact for detecting the attachment of the accessory to the electronic device is in contact but the contact for communication between the electronic device and the accessory remains in contact, a communication error occurs.
 本発明は、アクセサリの装着時に一部の端子が非接触となることによる通信エラーの発生を低減することができるようにした電子機器およびアクセサリを提供する。 The present invention provides an electronic device and an accessory capable of reducing the occurrence of a communication error due to some terminals becoming non-contact when the accessory is attached.
 本発明の一側面としての電子機器は、アクセサリが着脱可能に装着され、アクセサリと電気的に接続される複数の接点が一列に配列されている。複数の接点は、電子機器へのアクセサリの装着の検出に用いられる装着検出接点と、アクセサリから電子機器への通信要求に用いられる通信要求接点とを含む。装着検出接点と通信要求接点は、複数の接点の配列方向における最も一端側の接点と最も他端側の接点との間に配置されている。装着検出接点は、通信要求接点と最も一端側の接点との間に配置されている。接点の配列方向において、装着検出接点と通信要求接点との間の距離が、通信要求接点と最も他端側の接点との間の距離よりも短いことを特徴とする。 In the electronic device as one aspect of the present invention, accessories are detachably attached, and a plurality of contacts electrically connected to the accessories are arranged in a row. The plurality of contacts include a mounting detection contact used for detecting the mounting of an accessory on an electronic device and a communication request contact used for a communication request from the accessory to the electronic device. The mounting detection contact and the communication request contact are arranged between the contact on the one end side and the contact on the other end side in the arrangement direction of the plurality of contacts. The mounting detection contact is arranged between the communication request contact and the contact on the farthest end side. In the arrangement direction of the contacts, the distance between the mounting detection contact and the communication request contact is shorter than the distance between the communication request contact and the contact on the farthest end side.
 また本発明の他の一側面としてのアクセサリは、電子機器に着脱可能に装着され、電子機器と電気的に接続される複数の接点が一列に配列されている。複数の接点は、電子機器へのアクセサリの装着の検出に用いられる装着検出接点と、アクセサリから電子機器への通信要求に用いられる通信要求接点とを含む。装着検出接点と通信要求接点は、複数の接点の配列方向における最も一端側の接点と最も他端側の接点との間に配置されている。装着検出接点は、通信要求接点と最も一端側の接点との間に配置されている。接点の配列方向において、装着検出接点と通信要求接点との間の距離が、通信要求接点と最も他端側の接点との間の距離よりも短いことを特徴とする。なお、上記電子機器と上記アクセサリを含むシステムも、本発明の他の一側面を構成する。 The accessory as another aspect of the present invention is detachably attached to an electronic device, and a plurality of contacts electrically connected to the electronic device are arranged in a row. The plurality of contacts include a mounting detection contact used for detecting the mounting of an accessory on an electronic device and a communication request contact used for a communication request from the accessory to the electronic device. The mounting detection contact and the communication request contact are arranged between the contact on the one end side and the contact on the other end side in the arrangement direction of the plurality of contacts. The mounting detection contact is arranged between the communication request contact and the contact on the farthest end side. In the arrangement direction of the contacts, the distance between the mounting detection contact and the communication request contact is shorter than the distance between the communication request contact and the contact on the farthest end side. A system including the electronic device and the accessory also constitutes another aspect of the present invention.
 本発明によれば、電子機器へのアクセサリの装着時に一部の端子が非接触となることによる通信エラーの発生を低減することができる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of communication errors due to non-contact of some terminals when an accessory is attached to an electronic device.
本発明の実施形態におけるカメラおよびアクセサリの構成を示す図。The figure which shows the structure of the camera and the accessory in embodiment of this invention. 実施形態においてアクセサリが装着されたカメラと、それらの接点の配置例を示す図。The figure which shows the camera which attached the accessory in embodiment, and the arrangement example of the contact point with them. 実施形態においてカメラに装着されたアクセサリに外力が加わる様子を示す図。The figure which shows how the external force is applied to the accessory attached to the camera in embodiment. 実施形態においてグラウンド接点の接続状態を判別するための構成を示す図。The figure which shows the structure for determining the connection state of the ground contact in an embodiment. 実施形態においてカメラにより実行される処理を示すフローチャート。The flowchart which shows the process executed by the camera in embodiment. 実施形態のカメラにより実行される処理を示すフローチャート。The flowchart which shows the process executed by the camera of embodiment. 実施形態における電源接点と隣り合う接点がショートしたときの信号変化を示すタイミングチャート。A timing chart showing a signal change when a contact adjacent to a power supply contact in the embodiment is short-circuited. 実施形態におけるアクセサリの種類に対する機能信号の割り当て例を示す図。The figure which shows the example of the assignment of the function signal with respect to the type of an accessory in an embodiment. 実施形態における機能信号の接続先の構成を示す図。The figure which shows the structure of the connection destination of the functional signal in embodiment. 実施形態におけるカメラとアクセサリの構成例を示す図。The figure which shows the configuration example of the camera and the accessory in embodiment. 実施形態におけるカメラとアクセサリの他の構成例を示す図。The figure which shows the other configuration example of the camera and the accessory in embodiment. 実施形態におけるカメラとアクセサリのさらに別の構成例を示す図。The figure which shows still another configuration example of a camera and an accessory in an embodiment. 実施形態におけるアクセサリの構成例を示す図。The figure which shows the structural example of the accessory in embodiment. 実施形態におけるカメラ、アクセサリおよび中間アクセサリの構成例を示す図。The figure which shows the structural example of the camera, the accessory and the intermediate accessory in embodiment. 実施形態におけるカメラ、アクセサリおよび中間アクセサリの他の構成例を示す図。The figure which shows the other configuration example of the camera, the accessory and the intermediate accessory in embodiment. 実施形態においてアクセサリがストロボ機器である場合のタイミングチャート。A timing chart when the accessory is a strobe device in the embodiment. 実施形態におけるカメラおよびアクセサリである外部フラッシュユニットの斜視図。FIG. 3 is a perspective view of an external flash unit which is a camera and an accessory in the embodiment. 実施形態におけるアクセサリシューの分解図および斜視図。Exploded view and perspective view of the accessory shoe in the embodiment. 実施形態におけるアクセサリシューの係合部材と接続端子コネクタの構造を示す図。The figure which shows the structure of the engaging member of the accessory shoe and the connection terminal connector in embodiment. 実施形態における外部フラッシュユニットの斜視図と断面図。A perspective view and a cross-sectional view of the external flash unit according to the embodiment. 実施形態におけるカメラ接続部の内部構造を示す斜視図と正面図。A perspective view and a front view showing the internal structure of the camera connection portion in the embodiment. 実施形態におけるカメラ接続部の上面図と断面図。Top view and cross-sectional view of the camera connection portion in the embodiment. 変形例としての外部フラッシュユニットの斜視図と断面図。A perspective view and a cross-sectional view of an external flash unit as a modification. 変形例における接続部の内部構造を示す斜視図と正面図。A perspective view and a front view showing the internal structure of the connection portion in the modified example. 実施形態におけるアクセサリシューの正面図。The front view of the accessory shoe in an embodiment. 実施形態における接続プラグの一部の拡大図。An enlarged view of a part of the connection plug in the embodiment. 実施形態においてアクセサリシューにカメラ接続部が装着された状態を示す正面断面図。The front sectional view which shows the state which the camera connection part was attached to the accessory shoe in embodiment.
 以下、本発明の実施形態について図面を参照しながら説明する。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
 図1は、本発明の実施形態である電子機器としてのカメラ100とこれに着脱可能に装着されるアクセサリ200の電気的構成を示している。カメラ100とアクセサリ200は、カメラ100に設けられたカメラ接続部141の複数の接点(端子)TC01~TC21とアクセサリ200に設けられたアクセサリ接続部211の複数の接点TA01~TA21とがそれぞれ一対一で接触することで電気的に接続される。 FIG. 1 shows an electrical configuration of a camera 100 as an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention and an accessory 200 detachably attached to the camera 100. In the camera 100 and the accessory 200, the plurality of contacts (terminals) TC01 to TC21 of the camera connection portion 141 provided in the camera 100 and the plurality of contacts TA01 to TA21 of the accessory connection portion 211 provided in the accessory 200 are one-to-one, respectively. It is electrically connected by contacting with.
 カメラ100は、電池111から電力を供給される。電池111はカメラ100に対して着脱が可能である。カメラ100の制御手段としてのカメラ制御回路101は、カメラ100全体を制御する回路であり、CPU等を内蔵したマイクロコンピュータにより構成される。 The camera 100 is supplied with electric power from the battery 111. The battery 111 can be attached to and detached from the camera 100. The camera control circuit 101 as a control means of the camera 100 is a circuit that controls the entire camera 100, and is composed of a microcomputer having a built-in CPU or the like.
 システム電源回路112は、カメラ100の各回路に供給するための電源を生成する回路であり、DCDCコンバータ回路、LDO(Low Drop Out)およびチャージポンプ回路等により構成される。電池111からカメラ制御回路101には、システム電源回路112で生成された電圧1.8Vがカメラマイコン電源VMCU_Cとして常時供給される。カメラ制御回路101は、システム電源回路112を制御することで、カメラ100の各回路への電源供給のオン・オフ制御を行う。 The system power supply circuit 112 is a circuit that generates power for supplying power to each circuit of the camera 100, and is composed of a DCDC converter circuit, an LDO (Low Drop Out), a charge pump circuit, and the like. The voltage 1.8V generated by the system power supply circuit 112 is constantly supplied from the battery 111 to the camera control circuit 101 as the camera microcomputer power supply VMCU_C. The camera control circuit 101 controls the system power supply circuit 112 to turn on / off the power supply to each circuit of the camera 100.
 光学レンズ121は、カメラ100に着脱可能である。光学レンズ121を介して入射した被写体からの光は、CMOSセンサやCCDセンサ等からなる撮像センサ122上に結像される。撮像センサ122上に結像された被写体像は、デジタル撮像信号に符号化される。画像処理回路123は、デジタル撮像信号に対して、ノイズリダクション処理やホワイトバランス処理等の画像処理を行って画像データを生成し、該画像データを記録用メモリ126に記録するために、JPEG形式等の画像ファイルに変換する。また画像処理回路123は、画像データから表示回路127に表示するためのVRAM画像データを生成する。 The optical lens 121 is removable from the camera 100. The light from the subject incident through the optical lens 121 is imaged on the image pickup sensor 122 including a CMOS sensor, a CCD sensor, or the like. The subject image formed on the image pickup sensor 122 is encoded into a digital image pickup signal. The image processing circuit 123 performs image processing such as noise reduction processing and white balance processing on the digital image pickup signal to generate image data, and in order to record the image data in the recording memory 126, a PEG format or the like is used. Convert to an image file of. Further, the image processing circuit 123 generates VRAM image data for display on the display circuit 127 from the image data.
 メモリ制御回路124は、画像処理回路123等で生成される画像データや他のデータの送受を制御する。揮発性メモリ125は、DDR3SDRAM等の高速な読み出しと書き込みが可能なメモリであり、画像処理回路123で行われる画像処理のワークスペース等に使用される。記録用メモリ126は、不図示の接続部を介してカメラ100に着脱可能なSDカードやCFexpressカード等の読み書き可能な記録メディアである。表示回路127は、カメラ100の背面に配置されたディスプレイであり、LCDパネルや有機ELディスプレイパネル等により構成される。バックライト回路128は、表示回路127のバックライトの光量を変更することで表示回路127の明るさを調整する。 The memory control circuit 124 controls the transmission and reception of image data and other data generated by the image processing circuit 123 and the like. The volatile memory 125 is a memory capable of high-speed reading and writing such as DDR3 SDRAM, and is used for an image processing workspace or the like performed by the image processing circuit 123. The recording memory 126 is a readable and writable recording medium such as an SD card or CFexpress card that can be attached to and detached from the camera 100 via a connection portion (not shown). The display circuit 127 is a display arranged on the back surface of the camera 100, and is composed of an LCD panel, an organic EL display panel, and the like. The backlight circuit 128 adjusts the brightness of the display circuit 127 by changing the amount of light from the backlight of the display circuit 127.
 電源供給手段としてのアクセサリ用電源回路A131とアクセサリ用電源回路B132はそれぞれ、システム電源回路112より供給された電圧を所定の電圧に変換する電圧変換回路であり、本実施形態ではアクセサリ電源VACCとして3.3Vを生成する。 The accessory power supply circuit A131 and the accessory power supply circuit B132 as the power supply means are voltage conversion circuits that convert the voltage supplied from the system power supply circuit 112 into a predetermined voltage, respectively. Generates .3V.
 アクセサリ用電源回路A131は、LDO等で構成される自己消費電力が小さい電源回路である。アクセサリ用電源回路B132は、DC/DCコンバータ回路等で構成され、アクセサリ用電源回路A131よりも大きな電流を流すことができる回路である。なお、アクセサリ用電源回路B132の自己消費電力は、アクセサリ用電源回路A131よりも大きい。このため、負荷電流が小さいときにはアクセサリ用電源回路A131の方がアクセサリ用電源回路B132よりも効率が良く、負荷電流が大きいときにはアクセサリ用電源回路B132の方がアクセサリ用電源回路A131よりも効率が良くなる。カメラ制御回路101は、アクセサリ200の動作状態に応じてアクセサリ用電源回路A131とアクセサリ用電源回路B132の電圧出力のオン・オフを制御する。 The accessory power supply circuit A131 is a power supply circuit composed of an LDO or the like and having low self-consumption. The accessory power supply circuit B132 is a circuit composed of a DC / DC converter circuit or the like and capable of passing a larger current than the accessory power supply circuit A131. The self-consumption of the accessory power supply circuit B132 is larger than that of the accessory power supply circuit A131. Therefore, when the load current is small, the accessory power supply circuit A131 is more efficient than the accessory power supply circuit B132, and when the load current is large, the accessory power supply circuit B132 is more efficient than the accessory power supply circuit A131. Become. The camera control circuit 101 controls on / off of the voltage output of the accessory power supply circuit A131 and the accessory power supply circuit B132 according to the operating state of the accessory 200.
 保護手段としての保護回路133は、電流ヒューズ素子、ポリスイッチ素子、または抵抗とアンプとスイッチ素子を組み合わせた電子ヒューズ回路等により構成され、アクセサリ用電源回路A131とアクセサリ用電源回路B132からアクセサリ200に供給される電源電流値が所定値を超えて過大(異常)になったときに過電流検出信号DET_OVCを出力する。本実施形態では、保護回路133は電子ヒューズ回路とし、1A以上の電流が流れた場合にカメラ制御回路101に対して過電流検出信号DET_OVCにて通知を行う。過電流検出信号DET_OVCは、Hiレベルによって過電流であることを示す。 The protection circuit 133 as a protection means is composed of a current fuse element, a polyswitch element, an electronic fuse circuit that combines a resistor, an amplifier, and a switch element, and the like, from the accessory power supply circuit A131 and the accessory power supply circuit B132 to the accessory 200. When the supplied power supply current value exceeds a predetermined value and becomes excessive (abnormal), the overcurrent detection signal DET_OVC is output. In the present embodiment, the protection circuit 133 is an electronic fuse circuit, and when a current of 1 A or more flows, the camera control circuit 101 is notified by an overcurrent detection signal DET_OVC. The overcurrent detection signal DET_OVC indicates that the overcurrent is due to the Hi level.
 カメラ接続部141は、一列に配列された21個の接点TC01~TC21を介してアクセサリ200と電気的な接続を行うためのコネクタである。接点TC01~TC21は、これらの配列方向の一端から他端にこの順で配置されている。 The camera connection unit 141 is a connector for making an electrical connection with the accessory 200 via 21 contacts TC01 to TC21 arranged in a row. The contacts TC01 to TC21 are arranged in this order from one end to the other end in the arrangement direction thereof.
 TC01はグラウンド(GND)に接続されており、基準電位(GND電位)の接点としてだけではなく、次に説明する差動信号D1Nと差動信号D1Pの配線インピーダンスをコントロールする接点としての用途も兼ねている。TC01は第3のグラウンド接点に相当する。 The TC01 is connected to the ground (GND) and is used not only as a contact for the reference potential (GND potential) but also as a contact for controlling the wiring impedance of the differential signal D1N and the differential signal D1P described below. ing. TC01 corresponds to the third ground contact.
 TC02に接続された差動信号D1NとTC03に接続された差動信号D1Pは、ペアとなってデータ通信を行う差動データ通信信号であり、カメラ制御回路101に接続されている。TC02、TC03、後述するTC07~TC17、TC19およびTC20は通信接点である。 The differential signal D1N connected to the TC02 and the differential signal D1P connected to the TC03 are differential data communication signals that perform data communication in pairs, and are connected to the camera control circuit 101. TC02, TC03, TC07 to TC17, TC19 and TC20, which will be described later, are communication contacts.
 第1のグラウンド接点としてのTC04はGNDに接続されており、カメラ100とアクセサリ200の基準電位の接点となる。TC04は、次に説明するTC05よりも接点の配列方向における外側に配置されている。 TC04 as the first ground contact is connected to GND and serves as a reference potential contact between the camera 100 and the accessory 200. The TC04 is arranged outside the TC05 described below in the contact arrangement direction.
 電源接点としてのTC05には保護回路133を介してアクセサリ用電源回路A131,B132で生成されたアクセサリ電源VACCが接続されている。 The accessory power supply VACC generated by the accessory power supply circuits A131 and B132 is connected to the TC05 as the power supply contact via the protection circuit 133.
 装着検出接点としてのTC06にはアクセサリ装着検出信号/ACC_DETが接続されている。アクセサリ装着検出信号/ACC_DETは、抵抗素子Rp134(10kΩ)を介してカメラマイコン電源VMCU_Cにプルアップされている。カメラ制御回路101は、アクセサリ装着検出信号/ACC_DETの信号レベルを読み出すことでアクセサリ200の装着有無を検出することが可能である。アクセサリ装着検出信号/ACC_DETの信号レベル(電位)がHiレベル(所定電位)であればアクセサリ200が未装着と検出され、Loレベル(後述するようにGND電位)であればアクセサリ200が装着状態と検出される。 The accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET is connected to TC06 as the mounting detection contact. The accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET is pulled up to the camera microcomputer power supply VMCU_C via the resistance element Rp134 (10 kΩ). The camera control circuit 101 can detect whether or not the accessory 200 is attached by reading the accessory attachment detection signal / ACC_DET signal level. If the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET signal level (potential) is Hi level (predetermined potential), accessory 200 is detected as not mounted, and if it is Lo level (GND potential as described later), accessory 200 is mounted. Detected.
 カメラ100の電源ON時にアクセサリ装着検出信号/ACC_DETの信号レベル(電位)がHiレベルからLoレベルになることがトリガーとなり、カメラ100とアクセサリ200との間で接点を介した各種伝達が行われる。 When the power of the camera 100 is turned on, the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET signal level (potential) changes from the Hi level to the Lo level as a trigger, and various transmissions are performed between the camera 100 and the accessory 200 via contacts.
 カメラ制御回路101は、アクセサリ200が装着状態になったことを検出することに応じて、電源接点としてのTC05を介してアクセサリ200に対して電源供給を行う。 The camera control circuit 101 supplies power to the accessory 200 via the TC05 as a power contact in response to detecting that the accessory 200 is in the mounted state.
 TC07に接続されたSCLK、TC08に接続されたMOSI、TC09に接続されたMISOおよびTC10に接続されたCSは、カメラ制御回路101が通信マスターとなってSPI(Serial Peripheral Interface)通信を行うための信号である。本実施形態では、SPI通信の通信クロック周波数は1MHzとする。 For SCLK connected to TC07, MOSI connected to TC08, MISO connected to TC09, and CS connected to TC10, the camera control circuit 101 acts as a communication master to perform SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication. It is a signal. In the present embodiment, the communication clock frequency of SPI communication is 1 MHz.
 TC11には、アクセサリ200からカメラ制御回路101に対して通信を要求するための通信要求信号/WAKEが接続されている。通信要求信号/WAKEは、抵抗を介してカメラマイコン電源VMCU_Cにプルアップされている。カメラ制御回路101は、通信要求信号/WAKEの立下りエッジを検出することでアクセサリ200からの通信要求を受信することができる。 A communication request signal / WAKE for requesting communication from the accessory 200 to the camera control circuit 101 is connected to the TC11. The communication request signal / WAKE is pulled up to the camera microcomputer power supply VMCU_C via a resistor. The camera control circuit 101 can receive the communication request from the accessory 200 by detecting the communication request signal / the falling edge of WAKE.
 TC12に接続されたSDAおよびTC13に接続されたSCLは、カメラ制御回路101が通信マスターとなってI2C(Inter-Integrated Circuit)通信を行うための信号である。SDAとSCLは、カメラマイコン電源VMCU_Cにプルアップされたオープンドレイン方式での通信(以下、オープンドレイン通信という)用の信号であり、本実施形態では通信周波数は100kbpsとする。 The SDA connected to the TC12 and the SCL connected to the TC13 are signals for the camera control circuit 101 to act as a communication master and perform I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication. The SDA and SCL are signals for open-drain communication (hereinafter referred to as open-drain communication) pulled up to the camera microcomputer power supply VMCU_C, and the communication frequency is 100 kbps in this embodiment.
 I2C通信では、SDAを介してカメラ100からのデータ送信、アクセサリ200からのデータ送信の双方が行われる。SPI通信とI2C通信を比較すると、I2C通信は、SPI通信に比べて通信速度が低速であり、低消費電力での通信が可能である。また、SPI通信のほうがI2C通信よりも通信速度が高速であるためデータ量の多い情報の通信に適している。そのため、本実施形態のカメラ100とアクセサリ200との通信においては、データ量の多い情報はSPI通信を用いて通信し、データ量の少ない情報はI2C通信を用いて通信する。例えば、まずI2C通信を用いてデータを通信し、このデータに基づいてSPI通信が実行可能である場合やSPI通信を実行する必要がある場合には、さらにSPI通信を実行するように制御することができる。 In I2C communication, both data transmission from the camera 100 and data transmission from the accessory 200 are performed via the SDA. Comparing SPI communication and I2C communication, I2C communication has a lower communication speed than SPI communication, and communication with low power consumption is possible. Further, SPI communication has a higher communication speed than I2C communication, and is therefore suitable for communication of information having a large amount of data. Therefore, in the communication between the camera 100 and the accessory 200 of the present embodiment, the information having a large amount of data is communicated by using SPI communication, and the information having a small amount of data is communicated by using I2C communication. For example, data is first communicated using I2C communication, and when SPI communication can be executed or SPI communication needs to be executed based on this data, control is performed so that SPI communication is further executed. Can be done.
 TC14(同期接点)に接続されたFNC1信号、TC15に接続されたFNC2信号、TC16に接続されたFNC3信号およびTC17に接続されたFNC4信号は、装着されたアクセサリ200の種類に応じて機能を変更可能な信号である。例えば、アクセサリ200がマイク機器である場合はTC15を介して通信される信号は音声データ信号となる。また、アクセサリ200が照明(ストロボまたはフラッシュ)機器である場合はTC14を介して通信される信号は発光のタイミングを制御する信号となる。なお、装着されたアクセサリの種類によって、同じ接点を介して異なる機能を実現する信号が通信されるようにしてもよい。例えばアクセサリ200が照明機器以外のアクセサリである場合に、TC14を介して発光タイミングとは異なるタイミングを制御するための同期信号が通信されるようにしてもよい。TC14~TC17は機能信号接点に相当する。機能信号接点の少なくともいずれかを用いた通信を機能信号通信とも称する。 The FNC1 signal connected to the TC14 (synchronous contact), the FNC2 signal connected to the TC15, the FNC3 signal connected to the TC16, and the FNC4 signal connected to the TC17 change their functions according to the type of accessory 200 installed. It is a possible signal. For example, when the accessory 200 is a microphone device, the signal communicated via the TC 15 is an audio data signal. When the accessory 200 is a lighting (strobe or flash) device, the signal communicated via the TC 14 is a signal for controlling the timing of light emission. Depending on the type of accessory attached, signals that realize different functions may be communicated via the same contact. For example, when the accessory 200 is an accessory other than a lighting device, a synchronization signal for controlling a timing different from the light emission timing may be communicated via the TC14. TC14 to TC17 correspond to functional signal contacts. Communication using at least one of the functional signal contacts is also referred to as functional signal communication.
 機能信号通信は、I2C通信・SPI通信と並行して、I2C通信・SPI通信に依存しないタイミングで通信を実行することができる。 Functional signal communication can execute communication at a timing that does not depend on I2C communication / SPI communication in parallel with I2C communication / SPI communication.
 ここでいうアクセサリの種類とは、上述したマイク機器や照明機器等である。性能が異なる照明同士のように、同じ目的の機能を実現するアクセサリは同じ種類のアクセサリである。マイク機器と照明機器のように、異なる目的の機能を実現するアクセサリは異なる種類のアクセサリである。 The types of accessories referred to here are the above-mentioned microphone devices, lighting devices, and the like. Accessories that achieve the same purpose, such as lights with different performances, are the same type of accessory. Accessories that achieve different purposes, such as microphone and lighting equipment, are different types of accessories.
 機能信号通信は、I2C通信またはSPI通信によって取得された情報に基づいて実行される。 Functional signal communication is executed based on the information acquired by I2C communication or SPI communication.
 第2のグラウンド接点(基準電位接点)としてのTC18もGNDに接続されており、TC04と同様に、カメラ100とアクセサリ200の基準電位となる接点である。 The TC18 as the second ground contact (reference potential contact) is also connected to GND, and is the contact that serves as the reference potential between the camera 100 and the accessory 200, like the TC04.
 TC19(第1の差動信号接点)に接続された差動信号D2NとTC20(第2の差動信号接点)に接続された差動信号D2Pは、それらがペアとなってデータ通信を行うデータ通信信号であり、カメラ制御回路101と接続されている。TC19とTC20とを介して、例えばUSB通信を行うことが可能である。 The differential signal D2N connected to TC19 (first differential signal contact) and the differential signal D2P connected to TC20 (second differential signal contact) are data in which they perform data communication in pairs. It is a communication signal and is connected to the camera control circuit 101. For example, USB communication can be performed via TC19 and TC20.
 TC21はGNDに接続されており、基準電位の接点としてだけではなく、差動信号D2Nと差動信号D2Pの配線インピーダンスをコントロールする接点としての用途も兼ねる。TC21は第4のグラウンド接点に相当する。接点TC01、TC04、TC06、TC18、TC21は、例えば、後述する図17に示すフレキシブル基板158のGND部に接続され、フレキシブル基板158のGND部がカメラ100のGNDレベルとなる金属性の部材とビス157などで固定される。GNDレベルとなる金属性の部材は、例えば、係合部材151やカメラ100内部の不図示のベースプレート等がある。 The TC21 is connected to GND and is used not only as a contact for a reference potential but also as a contact for controlling the wiring impedance of the differential signal D2N and the differential signal D2P. TC21 corresponds to the fourth ground contact. The contacts TC01, TC04, TC06, TC18, and TC21 are connected to, for example, the GND portion of the flexible substrate 158 shown in FIG. 17, which will be described later, and the GND portion of the flexible substrate 158 becomes the GND level of the camera 100. It is fixed at 157 or the like. Metallic members having a GND level include, for example, an engaging member 151, a base plate (not shown) inside the camera 100, and the like.
 本実施形態では、クロック信号であるSCLK(第1のクロック信号)を伝達する接点(第1のクロック接点)TC07の隣に、アクセサリ装着検出信号/ACC_DETが接続されている装着検出接点TC06を配置している。一般に、クロック信号の接点に隣接した接点には、クロック信号の電位変動に伴うノイズ(クロックノイズ)が伝わり、これが誤動作の要因となり得る。特に、本実施形態のように接点数が多く、接点間の距離が短い構成においては、その影響がより大きくなる。そこで、SCLK接点TC07の隣に、装着検出接点TC06を配置することで、クロックノイズの影響を抑えることができる。 In the present embodiment, the mounting detection contact TC06 to which the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET is connected is arranged next to the contact (first clock contact) TC07 that transmits the clock signal SCLK (first clock signal). doing. In general, noise (clock noise) associated with a potential fluctuation of a clock signal is transmitted to a contact adjacent to the contact of the clock signal, which may cause a malfunction. In particular, in a configuration such as the present embodiment in which the number of contacts is large and the distance between the contacts is short, the effect is greater. Therefore, by arranging the mounting detection contact TC06 next to the SCLK contact TC07, the influence of clock noise can be suppressed.
 アクセサリ装着検出信号/ACC_DETは、アクセサリ装着前はプルアップされているが、アクセサリ装着後はGND電位に設定される。一方、クロック信号を伝達するSCLK接点TC07は、アクセサリ装着前はクロック信号を伝達しないので、電位の変動がなく、アクセサリ装着後にのみクロック信号を伝達するために電位が変動する。 The accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET is pulled up before the accessory is mounted, but is set to the GND potential after the accessory is mounted. On the other hand, since the SCLK contact TC07 that transmits the clock signal does not transmit the clock signal before the accessory is attached, the potential does not fluctuate, and the potential fluctuates because the clock signal is transmitted only after the accessory is attached.
 SCLK接点TC07がクロック信号を伝達する際に、装着検出接点TC06はGND電位になっている。このため、装着検出接点TC06がクロックノイズを受けても、カメラ100やアクセサリ200の制御回路の電位は変動しにくいため、誤動作を防ぐことができる。また、装着検出接点TC06よりも離れた位置へクロックノイズが伝わるのを抑制することができる。その結果、GND端子を配置せずに済むので、接点数を増やさずにクロックノイズの影響を抑制することができる。 When the SCLK contact TC07 transmits a clock signal, the mounting detection contact TC06 is at the GND potential. Therefore, even if the mounting detection contact TC06 receives clock noise, the potential of the control circuit of the camera 100 or the accessory 200 is unlikely to fluctuate, so that malfunction can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to suppress the transmission of clock noise to a position farther than the mounting detection contact TC06. As a result, since it is not necessary to arrange the GND terminal, the influence of clock noise can be suppressed without increasing the number of contacts.
 また、接点(第2のクロック接点)TC13にもクロック信号としてのSCL(第2のクロック信号)が伝達される。しかし、SCLK接点TC07に伝達されるSCLKの方がSCLよりも周波数が高く、SCLK接点TC07からの方がSCL接点TC13からに比べてクロックノイズをより多く発生する。このため、装着検出接点TC06を、SCL接点TC13の隣ではなく、SCLK接点TC07の隣に配置する方が、クロックノイズによる誤動作を防ぐ効果が大きい。 Further, SCL (second clock signal) as a clock signal is also transmitted to the contact (second clock contact) TC13. However, the frequency of SCLK transmitted to the SCLK contact TC07 is higher than that of the SCL, and the SCLK contact TC07 generates more clock noise than the SCL contact TC13. Therefore, if the mounting detection contact TC06 is arranged next to the SCLK contact TC07 instead of next to the SCL contact TC13, the effect of preventing malfunction due to clock noise is greater.
 さらに、周波数の違いだけでなく、SCL接点TC13で伝達されるSCLは、I2C通信規格のクロック信号であり、信号線の電圧の変動はオープンドレイン接続で駆動される。一方、SCLK接点TC07で伝達されるSCLKは、SPI通信規格のクロック信号であり、信号線の電圧の変動はCMOS出力で駆動される。このため、SCL接点TC13の方がSCLK接点TC07に比べて電圧の変動のエッジが緩やかになりやすく、クロックノイズが発生しにくい。したがって、装着検出接点TC06を、SCL接点TC13の隣ではなくSCLK接点TC07の隣に配置する方がクロックノイズによる誤動作を防ぐ効果が大きい。 Furthermore, not only the difference in frequency, but also the SCL transmitted by the SCL contact TC13 is a clock signal of the I2C communication standard, and the fluctuation of the voltage of the signal line is driven by the open drain connection. On the other hand, the SCLK transmitted by the SCLK contact TC07 is a clock signal of the SPI communication standard, and the fluctuation of the voltage of the signal line is driven by the CMOS output. Therefore, the SCL contact TC13 tends to have a gentler edge of voltage fluctuation than the SCLK contact TC07, and clock noise is less likely to occur. Therefore, arranging the mounting detection contact TC06 next to the SCLK contact TC07 rather than next to the SCL contact TC13 is more effective in preventing malfunction due to clock noise.
 また、第1および第2の差動信号接点TC19、TC20にもペアで差動信号D1N、D1Pを伝達して、クロック信号を伝達する場合がある。その際、SCLK接点TC07やSCL接点TC13よりも周波数が高いクロック信号(第3のクロック信号)を伝達することがある。しかし、差動信号D1N、D1Pはペア信号であるために、シングルエンド信号を伝達するSCLK接点TC07やSCL接点TC13よりもクロックノイズの放射は少ない。このため、装着検出接点TC06を、第1および第2の差動信号接点TC19、TC20の隣ではなく、SCLK接点TC07の隣に配置する方が、クロックノイズによる誤動作を防ぐ効果が大きい。 Further, the differential signals D1N and D1P may be transmitted in pairs to the first and second differential signal contacts TC19 and TC20 to transmit the clock signal. At that time, a clock signal (third clock signal) having a frequency higher than that of the SCLK contact TC07 and the SCL contact TC13 may be transmitted. However, since the differential signals D1N and D1P are pair signals, the emission of clock noise is smaller than that of the SCLK contact TC07 and the SCL contact TC13 that transmit the single-ended signal. Therefore, it is more effective to prevent the malfunction due to the clock noise by arranging the mounting detection contact TC06 next to the SCLK contact TC07 instead of next to the first and second differential signal contacts TC19 and TC20.
 なお、SCLK接点TC07の装着検出接点TC06とは反対側の隣に配置された接点(第1のデータ接点)TC08は、MOSI(第1のデータ信号)を伝達する。MOSIはデータ信号であるので、クロックノイズの影響を受けやすいように見える。しかし、MOSIは、SCLK接点TC07で伝達されるクロック信号と同一のSPI通信規格のデータ信号であるため、電位の変動タイミングがクロック信号と同期しており、クロックノイズの影響を受けにくい。このため、接点TC08をGND電位に固定しなくてよく、MOSI接点として用いることができる。 Note that the contact (first data contact) TC08 arranged next to the mounting detection contact TC06 of the SCLK contact TC07 transmits MOSI (first data signal). Since MOSI is a data signal, it appears to be susceptible to clock noise. However, since the MOSI is a data signal of the same SPI communication standard as the clock signal transmitted by the SCLK contact TC07, the fluctuation timing of the potential is synchronized with the clock signal and is not easily affected by the clock noise. Therefore, the contact TC08 does not have to be fixed to the GND potential and can be used as a MOSI contact.
 アクセサリ200は、電池205を有し、該電池205からの電力供給を受けるとともに、カメラ接続部141とアクセサリ接続部211を介してカメラ100からの電力供給も受ける。アクセサリ200の制御手段としてのアクセサリ制御回路201は、アクセサリ200全体を制御する回路であり、CPU等を内蔵したマイクロコンピュータである。 The accessory 200 has a battery 205 and receives power supply from the battery 205 and also receives power supply from the camera 100 via the camera connection unit 141 and the accessory connection unit 211. The accessory control circuit 201 as a control means of the accessory 200 is a circuit that controls the entire accessory 200, and is a microcomputer having a built-in CPU and the like.
 アクセサリ電源回路202は、アクセサリ200の各回路に供給するための電源を生成する回路であり、DCDCコンバータ回路やLDOやチャージポンプ回路等で構成されている。アクセサリ制御回路201には、アクセサリ電源回路202で生成された電圧1.8Vがアクセサリマイコン電源VMCU_Aとして常時供給される。アクセサリ電源回路202を制御することで、アクセサリ200の各回路への電源供給のオン・オフ制御が行われる。 The accessory power supply circuit 202 is a circuit that generates a power supply for supplying power to each circuit of the accessory 200, and is composed of a DCDC converter circuit, an LDO, a charge pump circuit, and the like. The voltage 1.8V generated by the accessory power supply circuit 202 is constantly supplied to the accessory control circuit 201 as the accessory microcomputer power supply VMCU_A. By controlling the accessory power supply circuit 202, on / off control of power supply to each circuit of the accessory 200 is performed.
 充電回路204は、カメラ100から供給された電力を用いて電池205を充電するための回路である。アクセサリ制御回路201は充電動作を行うのに十分な電力をカメラ100から供給されていると判断できる場合には、充電回路204を制御して電池205への充電を行う。なお、本実施形態ではアクセサリ200に電池205が装着される場合について説明しているが、電池205が装着されずにカメラ100からの給電のみでアクセサリ200が動作してもよい。この場合、充電回路204は不要となる。 The charging circuit 204 is a circuit for charging the battery 205 using the electric power supplied from the camera 100. When it can be determined that sufficient power is supplied from the camera 100 to perform the charging operation, the accessory control circuit 201 controls the charging circuit 204 to charge the battery 205. Although the case where the battery 205 is mounted on the accessory 200 is described in the present embodiment, the accessory 200 may operate only by supplying power from the camera 100 without mounting the battery 205. In this case, the charging circuit 204 becomes unnecessary.
 差動通信回路207は、カメラ100と差動通信を行うための回路であり、カメラ100との間でデータの送受信を行うことができる。外部通信IF回路208は、不図示の外部機器とデータ通信を行うためのIF回路であり、Ethernet通信IF、無線LAN通信IFおよび公衆ネットワーク通信IF等である。 The differential communication circuit 207 is a circuit for performing differential communication with the camera 100, and can transmit and receive data to and from the camera 100. The external communication IF circuit 208 is an IF circuit for performing data communication with an external device (not shown), such as an Ethernet communication IF, a wireless LAN communication IF, and a public network communication IF.
 アクセサリ制御回路201は、差動通信回路207および外部通信IF回路208を制御することで、カメラ100から受信したデータを外部機器に送信したり外部機器から受信したデータをカメラ100に送信したりすることができる。機能回路206は、アクセサリ200の種類に応じて異なる機能を有する回路である。機能回路206の構成例についは後述する。 The accessory control circuit 201 controls the differential communication circuit 207 and the external communication IF circuit 208 to transmit the data received from the camera 100 to the external device or the data received from the external device to the camera 100. be able to. The functional circuit 206 is a circuit having different functions depending on the type of the accessory 200. A configuration example of the functional circuit 206 will be described later.
 外部接続端子209は、外部機器と接続するためのコネクタ端子であり、本実施形態ではUSB TYPE-Cコネクタである。接続検出回路210は、外部接続端子209に外部機器が接続されたことを検出するための回路であり、アクセサリ制御回路201は接続検出回路210の出力信号を受信することで外部接続端子209への外部機器接続を検出することができる。 The external connection terminal 209 is a connector terminal for connecting to an external device, and is a USB TYPE-C connector in this embodiment. The connection detection circuit 210 is a circuit for detecting that an external device is connected to the external connection terminal 209, and the accessory control circuit 201 connects to the external connection terminal 209 by receiving the output signal of the connection detection circuit 210. External device connection can be detected.
 電源スイッチ203は、アクセサリ200の動作をオン・オフするためのスイッチであり、アクセサリ制御回路201は電源スイッチ203が接続された端子の信号レベルを読み出すことでオンポジション、オフポジションを検出できる。 The power switch 203 is a switch for turning on / off the operation of the accessory 200, and the accessory control circuit 201 can detect the on position and the off position by reading the signal level of the terminal to which the power switch 203 is connected.
 アクセサリ接続部211は、一列に配列された21個の接点TA01~TA21を介してカメラ100と電気的な接続を行うためのコネクタである。接点TA01~TA21は、これらの配列方向の一端から他端にこの順で配置されている。 The accessory connection unit 211 is a connector for electrically connecting to the camera 100 via 21 contacts TA01 to TA21 arranged in a row. The contacts TA01 to TA21 are arranged in this order from one end to the other end in the arrangement direction.
 TA01はGNDに接続されており、基準電位の接点としてだけではなく、差動信号D1Nと差動信号D1Pの配線インピーダンスをコントロールする接点としての用途も兼ねる。TA01は第3のグラウンド接点に相当する。 The TA01 is connected to GND and can be used not only as a contact for a reference potential but also as a contact for controlling the wiring impedance of the differential signal D1N and the differential signal D1P. TA01 corresponds to the third ground contact.
 TA02に接続された差動信号D1NとTA03に接続された差動信号D1Pは、それらがペアとなってデータ通信を行うデータ通信信号であり、差動通信回路207と接続されている。TA02、TA03、後述するTA07~TA17、TA19およびTA20は通信接点である。 The differential signal D1N connected to TA02 and the differential signal D1P connected to TA03 are data communication signals in which they perform data communication in pairs, and are connected to the differential communication circuit 207. TA02, TA03, TA07 to TA17, TA19 and TA20 described later are communication contacts.
 第1のグラウンド接点としてのTA04はGNDに接続されており、カメラ100とアクセサリ200の基準電位の接点となる。TA04は、次に説明するTA05よりも接点の配列方向における外側に配置されている。 TA04 as the first ground contact is connected to GND and serves as a reference potential contact between the camera 100 and the accessory 200. The TA04 is arranged outside the TA05 described below in the contact arrangement direction.
 電源接点としてのTA05にはアクセサリ電源回路202と充電回路204が接続されており、カメラ100から供給されるアクセサリ電源VACCが接続される。 The accessory power supply circuit 202 and the charging circuit 204 are connected to the TA05 as the power supply contact, and the accessory power supply VACC supplied from the camera 100 is connected.
 装着検出接点としてのTA06はGNDに直接接続されており、アクセサリ200がカメラ100に装着されたときに前述したアクセサリ装着検出信号/ACC_DETをLoレベルとしてのGNDレベルにする。これにより、カメラ100にアクセサリ200の装着を検出させるための接点となる。 The TA06 as a mounting detection contact is directly connected to the GND, and when the accessory 200 is mounted on the camera 100, the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET described above is set to the GND level as the Lo level. As a result, it becomes a contact point for causing the camera 100 to detect the attachment of the accessory 200.
 TA07に接続されたSCLK、TA08に接続されたMOSI、TA09に接続されたMISOおよびTA10に接続されたCSは、アクセサリ制御回路201が通信スレーブとなってSPI通信を行うための信号である。 The SCLK connected to TA07, the MOSI connected to TA08, the MISO connected to TA09, and the CS connected to TA10 are signals for the accessory control circuit 201 to act as a communication slave for SPI communication.
 TA11にはアクセサリ制御回路201からカメラ100に対して通信を要求するための通信要求信号/WAKEが接続されている。アクセサリ制御回路201は、カメラ100との通信が必要と判断した場合に、通信要求信号/WAKEをLo出力することでカメラ100に対して通信要求を行う。 A communication request signal / WAKE for requesting communication from the camera 100 from the accessory control circuit 201 is connected to the TA11. When the accessory control circuit 201 determines that communication with the camera 100 is necessary, the accessory control circuit 201 makes a communication request to the camera 100 by outputting a communication request signal / WAKE Lo.
 アクセサリ200が装着状態であることを検出することに応じてカメラ制御回路101からアクセサリ200に対してTC5を介した電源供給がなされると、アクセサリ制御回路201は通信要求信号/WAKEの信号レベル(電位)をHiレベルからLoレベルに変化させることで、電源供給を受けた旨をカメラ制御回路101に通知する。 When power is supplied from the camera control circuit 101 to the accessory 200 via the TC5 in response to detecting that the accessory 200 is in the mounted state, the accessory control circuit 201 receives a communication request signal / WAKE signal level ( By changing the potential) from the Hi level to the Lo level, the camera control circuit 101 is notified that the power supply has been received.
 アクセサリ制御回路201は、カメラからの要求がなくとも通信要求信号/WAKEの信号レベル(電位)をHiレベルからLoレベルに変化させることで、アクセサリ200がカメラ100と通信すべき要因が発生したことを通知することができる。この構成により、カメラ制御回路101はアクセサリ200に通信すべき要因が発生したか否かを、ポーリングすることよって周期的に確認する動作を省略することができる。また、アクセサリ200は通信すべき要因が発生した場合にその旨をリアルタイムにカメラ100に通信することが可能である。 The accessory control circuit 201 changes the communication request signal / WAKE signal level (potential) from the Hi level to the Lo level even if there is no request from the camera, so that a factor that causes the accessory 200 to communicate with the camera 100 has occurred. Can be notified. With this configuration, the camera control circuit 101 can omit the operation of periodically checking whether or not a factor for communication has occurred in the accessory 200 by polling. In addition, the accessory 200 can communicate to the camera 100 in real time when a factor to be communicated occurs.
 TA12に接続されたSDAおよびTA13に接続されたSCLは、アクセサリ制御回路201は通信スレーブとなってI2C通信を行うための信号である。 The SDA connected to the TA12 and the SCL connected to the TA13 are signals for the accessory control circuit 201 to act as a communication slave and perform I2C communication.
 TA14(同期接点)に接続されたFNC1信号、TA15に接続されたFNC2信号、TA16に接続されたFNC3信号およびTA17に接続されたFNC4信号は、アクセサリ200の種類に応じて機能を変更可能な信号である。例えば、アクセサリ200がマイク機器である場合は音声データ信号として、またアクセサリ200がストロボ機器である場合は発光のタイミングを制御する信号となる。TA14~TA17は機能信号接点に相当する。 The FNC1 signal connected to the TA14 (synchronous contact), the FNC2 signal connected to the TA15, the FNC3 signal connected to the TA16, and the FNC4 signal connected to the TA17 are signals whose functions can be changed according to the type of the accessory 200. Is. For example, when the accessory 200 is a microphone device, it is a voice data signal, and when the accessory 200 is a strobe device, it is a signal for controlling the timing of light emission. TA14 to TA17 correspond to functional signal contacts.
 第2のグラウンド接点(基準電位接点)としてのTA18もGNDに接続されており、TA04と同様に、カメラ100とアクセサリ200の基準電位の接点となる。 The TA18 as the second ground contact (reference potential contact) is also connected to GND, and like the TA04, it becomes the reference potential contact between the camera 100 and the accessory 200.
 TA19(第1の差動信号接点)に接続された差動信号D2NとTA20(第2の差動信号接点)に接続された差動信号D2Pは、それらがペアとなってデータ通信を行うデータ通信信号であり、外部接続端子209と接続されている。 The differential signal D2N connected to TA19 (first differential signal contact) and the differential signal D2P connected to TA20 (second differential signal contact) are data in which they are paired to perform data communication. It is a communication signal and is connected to the external connection terminal 209.
 TA21はGNDに接続されており、基準電位の接点としてだけではなく、差動信号D2Nと差動信号D2Pの配線インピーダンスをコントロールする端子としての用途も兼ねる。TA21は第4のグラウンド接点に相当する。 The TA21 is connected to GND and can be used not only as a contact point for a reference potential but also as a terminal for controlling the wiring impedance of the differential signal D2N and the differential signal D2P. TA21 corresponds to the fourth ground contact.
 接点TA01、TA04、TA06、TA18、TA21は、例えば、後述する図19に示すフレキシブル基板259のGND部に接続され、フレキシブル基板259のGND部がアクセサリ200のGNDレベルとなる金属性の部材と不図示のビス等で固定される。GNDレベルとなる金属性の部材は例えば、シュー取付脚251やアクセサリ200内部の不図示のベースプレート等がある。 The contacts TA01, TA04, TA06, TA18, and TA21 are connected to, for example, the GND portion of the flexible substrate 259 shown in FIG. 19 described later, and the GND portion of the flexible substrate 259 is not a metallic member that becomes the GND level of the accessory 200. It is fixed with the screws shown in the figure. Metallic members having a GND level include, for example, a shoe mounting leg 251 and a base plate (not shown) inside the accessory 200.
 図2(a)は、カメラ100の上部に設けられたアクセサリシューに配置されたカメラ接続部141に、アクセサリ(ストロボ機器)200の下部に設けられたシューに配置されたアクセサリ接続部211が接続された状態を示している。図2(b)は、カメラ接続部141における21個の接点TC01~TC21の配置例を示している。被写体側から見て右端にTC01が配置され、TC21までの21個の接点が一列に配列されている。このカメラ接続部141を有するアクセサリシューに対して、アクセサリのシューは図2(b)の上側から下側にスライドして装着される。 In FIG. 2A, the accessory connecting portion 211 arranged on the shoe provided on the lower part of the accessory (strobe device) 200 is connected to the camera connecting portion 141 arranged on the accessory shoe provided on the upper part of the camera 100. It shows the state that was done. FIG. 2B shows an arrangement example of 21 contacts TC01 to TC21 in the camera connection portion 141. TC01 is arranged at the right end when viewed from the subject side, and 21 contacts up to TC21 are arranged in a row. The accessory shoe is attached by sliding from the upper side to the lower side in FIG. 2B with respect to the accessory shoe having the camera connection portion 141.
 図2(c)は、アクセサリ接続部211における21個の接点TA01~TA21の配置例を示している。カメラ接続部141と同様に、被写体側から見て右端にTA01が配置され、TA21までの21個の接点が一列に配列されている。通常であれば、接点TA01~TA21とそれぞれに対応する接点TC01~TC21は互いに接触する。しかし、アクセサリ200に過度の静圧や衝撃が加わると、接点間の接触が離れるおそれがある。特に、アクセサリ200において接点が並ぶ方向に対して回転方向の力が作用すると、端の接点において接触離れが生じやすい。 FIG. 2C shows an arrangement example of 21 contacts TA01 to TA21 in the accessory connection portion 211. Similar to the camera connection portion 141, the TA01 is arranged at the right end when viewed from the subject side, and 21 contacts up to the TA21 are arranged in a row. Normally, the contacts TA01 to TA21 and the corresponding contacts TC01 to TC21 are in contact with each other. However, if excessive static pressure or impact is applied to the accessory 200, the contacts may be separated from each other. In particular, when a force in the rotational direction acts on the direction in which the contacts are lined up in the accessory 200, contact separation is likely to occur at the end contacts.
 図3(a)は、被写体側から見て左側からアクセサリ200に過度の静圧が加わった様子を誇張して示している。このとき、カメラ接続部141とアクセサリ接続部211の接点TC21,TA21およびその近傍の接点に対してそれらの接触が離れる方向に力が働き、接触不良が生じ易くなる。一方、接点TC01,TA01およびその近傍の接点に対しては通常状態に比べてより接触する方向に力が働く。 FIG. 3A exaggerates the appearance of excessive static pressure applied to the accessory 200 from the left side when viewed from the subject side. At this time, a force acts on the contacts TC21, TA21 of the camera connecting portion 141 and the accessory connecting portion 211 and the contacts in the vicinity thereof in the direction in which the contacts are separated from each other, and poor contact is likely to occur. On the other hand, a force acts on the contacts TC01 and TA01 and the contacts in the vicinity thereof in the direction of contact more than in the normal state.
 図3(b)は、被写体側から見て右側からアクセサリ200に過度の静圧が加わった様子を誇張して示している。このとき、カメラ接続部141とアクセサリ接続部211の接点TC01,TA01およびその近傍の接点に対してそれらの接触が離れる方向に力が働き、接触不良が生じ易くなる。一方、接点TC21,TA21およびその近傍の接点に対しては通常状態に比べてより接触する方向に力が働く。 FIG. 3B exaggerates the appearance of excessive static pressure applied to the accessory 200 from the right side when viewed from the subject side. At this time, a force acts on the contacts TC01 and TA01 of the camera connecting portion 141 and the accessory connecting portion 211 and the contacts in the vicinity thereof in the direction in which the contacts are separated from each other, and poor contact is likely to occur. On the other hand, a force acts on the contacts TC21, TA21 and the contacts in the vicinity thereof in the direction of contact more than in the normal state.
 本実施形態では、カメラ接続部141とアクセサリ接続部211の両端の接点であるTC01,TA01およびTC21,TA21をGNDに接続している。これにより、過度の静圧により一時的に一方の端の接点で接触不良が生じた場合においても、他方の端の接点でGND接続を確保することができる。このため、GND接続不良によってアクセサリ200の基準電位が不安定になり、その結果、各回路や電気素子がダメージを受けるおそれを低減することができる。 In the present embodiment, the contacts TC01, TA01 and TC21, TA21 at both ends of the camera connecting portion 141 and the accessory connecting portion 211 are connected to the GND. As a result, even if a contact failure occurs temporarily at the contact at one end due to excessive static pressure, the GND connection can be secured at the contact at the other end. Therefore, the reference potential of the accessory 200 becomes unstable due to the poor GND connection, and as a result, the risk of damage to each circuit or electric element can be reduced.
 また、アクセサリ接続部211の欠損故障等より、一部のGND接点がないアクセサリ200が装着された場合にはカメラ制御回路101はGND接点の一部がないことを検出することができない。このような場合には、残っているGND接点に動作電流が集中することになり、場合によってはアクセサリ200の動作不良を起こす懸念がある。 Further, the camera control circuit 101 cannot detect that a part of the GND contacts is missing when the accessory 200 without some GND contacts is attached due to a defect failure of the accessory connection portion 211 or the like. In such a case, the operating current is concentrated on the remaining GND contacts, and there is a concern that the accessory 200 may malfunction in some cases.
 図4Aは、アクセサリ200のGND接点の接続状態をカメラ100が検出できるようにするための構成の一例であり、図1に示した構成からグラウンド接点に関する部分を抜粋して示している。 FIG. 4A is an example of a configuration for allowing the camera 100 to detect the connection state of the GND contact of the accessory 200, and shows an excerpt of a portion related to the ground contact from the configuration shown in FIG.
 TC01、TC04、TC18およびTC21はそれぞれ、カメラ制御回路101の入力端子P1、P2、P3、P4に接続されており、抵抗1011Rp_g1、抵抗1021Rp_g2、抵抗1031Rp_g3および抵抗1041Rp_g4を介してカメラマイコン電源VMCU_Cにプルアップされている。また、TC01、TC04、TC18およびTC21には、SW回路1(1012)、SW回路2(1022)、SW回路3(1032)およびSW回路4(1042)がそれぞれ接続されている。 TC01, TC04, TC18 and TC21 are connected to the input terminals P1, P2, P3 and P4 of the camera control circuit 101, respectively, and are pulled to the camera microcomputer power supply VMCU_C via the resistors 1011Rp_g1, the resistors 1021Rp_g2, the resistors 1031Rp_g3 and the resistors 1041Rp_g4, respectively. It has been uploaded. Further, SW circuit 1 (1012), SW circuit 2 (1022), SW circuit 3 (1032) and SW circuit 4 (1042) are connected to TC01, TC04, TC18 and TC21, respectively.
 SW回路1は、カメラ制御回路101の制御信号により駆動するスイッチ回路であり、制御信号によってオンされるとTC01がGNDと接続される。SW回路1は、例えばFETで構成され、動作オン時のインピーダンスが極力小さく、動作オフ時のインピーダンスが極力大きくなる回路が望ましい。SW回路2、SW回路3、SW回路4も、図4Aに示す通り、SW回路1と同様の構成を有する。 The SW circuit 1 is a switch circuit driven by the control signal of the camera control circuit 101, and when it is turned on by the control signal, the TC01 is connected to GND. It is desirable that the SW circuit 1 is composed of, for example, FETs, the impedance when the operation is on is as small as possible, and the impedance when the operation is off is as large as possible. The SW circuit 2, the SW circuit 3, and the SW circuit 4 also have the same configuration as the SW circuit 1 as shown in FIG. 4A.
 図4Bのフローチャートは、図4Aに示した構成におけるグラウンド端子の接続状態を判別するシーケンスを示している。カメラ制御回路101は、コンピュータプログラムに従って本処理および後述する他の処理を実行する。Sはステップを意味する。 The flowchart of FIG. 4B shows a sequence for determining the connection state of the ground terminal in the configuration shown in FIG. 4A. The camera control circuit 101 executes this process and other processes described later according to a computer program. S means a step.
 S1001において、カメラ制御回路101は、アクセサリ装着検出信号/ACC_DETの信号レベルをモニタし、アクセサリ200が装着されているか否かを判定する。カメラ制御回路101は、信号レベルがHiであればアクセサリ200は未装着であるとしてS1001に戻って再び検出を行い、信号レベルがLoであればアクセサリ200が装着されたとしてS1002に進む。 In S1001, the camera control circuit 101 monitors the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET signal level and determines whether or not the accessory 200 is mounted. If the signal level is Hi, the camera control circuit 101 returns to S1001 and performs detection again, assuming that the accessory 200 is not attached, and if the signal level is Lo, proceeds to S1002 assuming that the accessory 200 is attached.
 S1002では、カメラ制御回路101は、SW回路1をオン、SW回路2、SW回路3およびSW回路4をそれぞれオフにする制御を行う。 In S1002, the camera control circuit 101 controls to turn on the SW circuit 1 and turn off the SW circuit 2, the SW circuit 3, and the SW circuit 4, respectively.
 S1003では、カメラ制御回路101は、入力端子P1の電圧レベルを確認し、LoレベルであればTC01はグラウンド接点と接続していると判定し、Hiレベルであればグラウンド接点と接続していないと判定する。 In S1003, the camera control circuit 101 confirms the voltage level of the input terminal P1, determines that TC01 is connected to the ground contact if it is Lo level, and that it is not connected to the ground contact if it is Hi level. judge.
 次にS1004では、カメラ制御回路101は、SW回路2をオン、SW回路1、SW回路3およびSW回路4をそれぞれオフにする制御を行う。 Next, in S1004, the camera control circuit 101 controls to turn on the SW circuit 2 and turn off the SW circuit 1, the SW circuit 3, and the SW circuit 4, respectively.
 S1005では、カメラ制御回路101は、入力端子P2の電圧レベルを確認し、LoレベルであればTC04はグラウンド接点と接続していると判定し、Hiレベルであればグラウンド接点と接続していないと判定する。 In S1005, the camera control circuit 101 confirms the voltage level of the input terminal P2, determines that the TC04 is connected to the ground contact if it is Lo level, and that it is not connected to the ground contact if it is Hi level. judge.
 次にS1006でカメラ制御回路101は、SW回路3をオン、SW回路1、SW回路2、SW回路4をそれぞれオフにする制御を行う。 Next, in S1006, the camera control circuit 101 controls to turn on the SW circuit 3 and turn off the SW circuit 1, the SW circuit 2, and the SW circuit 4, respectively.
 S1007でカメラ制御回路101は入力端子P3の電圧レベルを確認し、LoレベルであればTC18はグラウンド接点と接続していると判定し、Hiレベルであればグラウンド接点と接続していないと判定する。 In S1007, the camera control circuit 101 confirms the voltage level of the input terminal P3, and if it is Lo level, it is determined that TC18 is connected to the ground contact, and if it is Hi level, it is determined that it is not connected to the ground contact. ..
 次にS1008では、カメラ制御回路101は、SW回路4をオン、SW回路1、SW回路2およびSW回路3をそれぞれオフにする制御を行う。 Next, in S1008, the camera control circuit 101 controls to turn on the SW circuit 4 and turn off the SW circuit 1, the SW circuit 2, and the SW circuit 3, respectively.
 S1009では、カメラ制御回路101は、入力端子P4の電圧レベルを確認し、LoレベルであればTC18はグラウンド接点と接続していると判定し、Hiレベルであればグラウンド接点と接続していないと判定する。 In S1009, the camera control circuit 101 confirms the voltage level of the input terminal P4, determines that the TC18 is connected to the ground contact if it is Lo level, and that it is not connected to the ground contact if it is Hi level. judge.
 S1010では、カメラ制御回路101は、SW回路1、SW回路2、SW回路3およびSW回路4をそれぞれオンにする制御を行う。 In S1010, the camera control circuit 101 controls to turn on the SW circuit 1, the SW circuit 2, the SW circuit 3, and the SW circuit 4, respectively.
 このような制御を行うことで、カメラ制御回路101が装着されたアクセサリ200とのグラウンド接点の装着状態を確認することが可能となり、グラウンド接続状態に基づいてアクセサリ電源回路202への供給可否判断等を行うことができる。 By performing such control, it is possible to confirm the mounting state of the ground contact with the accessory 200 to which the camera control circuit 101 is mounted, and it is possible to determine whether or not to supply to the accessory power supply circuit 202 based on the ground connection state. It can be performed.
 ところで、カメラ100にアクセサリ200が装着されるときにカメラ100に対してアクセサリ200が傾く等していると、複数の接点TC01~TC21、TA01~TA21のうち一部の接点のみが接触する状態となり得る。図16に示すようにカメラ100に対するアクセサリ200の装着方向をZ方向、複数の接点TC01~TC21、TA01~TA21が並ぶ方向をX方向、X方向とZ方向に直交する方向をY方向とするとき、次のような場合に一部の接点のみが接触する状況が発生するおそれがある。 By the way, if the accessory 200 is tilted with respect to the camera 100 when the accessory 200 is attached to the camera 100, only some of the plurality of contacts TC01 to TC21 and TA01 to TA21 come into contact with each other. obtain. As shown in FIG. 16, when the mounting direction of the accessory 200 with respect to the camera 100 is the Z direction, the direction in which the plurality of contacts TC01 to TC21 and TA01 to TA21 are lined up is the X direction, and the direction orthogonal to the X direction and the Z direction is the Y direction. , In the following cases, there is a possibility that only some of the contacts will come into contact.
 まず、図3(a)、(b)に示すように、カメラ100に対してZ方向に平行な軸回りでアクセサリ200が傾くと、複数の接点のうちカメラ100とアクセサリ200が接近している側の接点同士は接触するが、カメラ100とアクセサリ200が離れている側の接点同士が接触しない状態となる。また、図示はしていないが、カメラ100に対してY方向に平行な軸回りでアクセサリ200が傾く(捻れる)と、複数の接点のうち接触した接点側とは反対側の接点同士が離れた状態となる。 First, as shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, when the accessory 200 is tilted around an axis parallel to the camera 100 in the Z direction, the camera 100 and the accessory 200 are close to each other among the plurality of contacts. The contacts on the side come into contact with each other, but the contacts on the side where the camera 100 and the accessory 200 are separated do not come into contact with each other. Further, although not shown, when the accessory 200 is tilted (twisted) around an axis parallel to the camera 100 in the Y direction, the contacts on the opposite side of the plurality of contacts that are in contact with each other are separated from each other. It will be in a state of
 後に図5を用いて詳しく説明するが、本実施形態のカメラ100とアクセサリ200は、カメラ100にアクセサリ200が装着された状態において種々の通信に先立って装着検出処理が実行される。この際、装着検出接点TC06、TA06が接触した状態であれば装着検出処理が実行可能となる。接点TC06、TA06を介した装着検出処理が実行された後、接点(以下、通信要求接点ともいう)TC11、TA11を介してアクセサリ200からカメラ100に通信要求信号/WAKEが出力される。カメラ100は、この通信要求信号/WAKEを検出することでアクセサリ200が通信可能状態であると判断して種々の通信を行う。しかし、カメラ100へのアクセサリ200の装着が検出されたにもかかわらずカメラ100が通信要求信号/WAKEを検出できない場合には、カメラ100はアクセサリ200との通信エラーが生じていると判断する。カメラ100へのアクセサリ200の装着途中にアクセサリ200が傾いたり捻れたりすることで一時的に複数の接点のうち一部の接点のみが接触する状態となって通信エラーの発生が判断され、警告等のエラー処理が行われると、ユーザがアクセサリ200が故障していると誤解するおそれがある。 As will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 5, in the camera 100 and the accessory 200 of the present embodiment, the attachment detection process is executed prior to various communications in the state where the accessory 200 is attached to the camera 100. At this time, if the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 are in contact with each other, the mounting detection process can be executed. After the mounting detection process via the contacts TC06 and TA06 is executed, the communication request signal / WAKE is output from the accessory 200 to the camera 100 via the contacts (hereinafter, also referred to as communication request contacts) TC11 and TA11. By detecting this communication request signal / WAKE, the camera 100 determines that the accessory 200 is in a communicable state and performs various communications. However, if the camera 100 cannot detect the communication request signal / WAKE even though the attachment of the accessory 200 to the camera 100 is detected, the camera 100 determines that a communication error with the accessory 200 has occurred. If the accessory 200 is tilted or twisted while the accessory 200 is attached to the camera 100, only some of the contacts are temporarily in contact with each other, and it is determined that a communication error has occurred. If the error processing is performed, the user may misunderstand that the accessory 200 is out of order.
 このため本実施形態では、カメラ100へのアクセサリ200の装着が検出されたにもかかわらずカメラ100が通信要求信号/WAKEを検出できない状況の発生を低減できるような接点の配置を採用している。 Therefore, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of contacts is adopted so as to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which the camera 100 cannot detect the communication request signal / WAKE even though the attachment of the accessory 200 to the camera 100 is detected. ..
 前述したように、カメラ100に対してZ方向に平行な軸回りでアクセサリ200が傾くと、図3(a)に示すように接点TC01、TA01およびその近傍の接点が接触して接点TC21、TA21およびその近傍の接点が接触しない状態か、図3(b)に示すように接点TC21、TA21およびその近傍の接点が接触して接点TC01、TA01およびその近傍の接点が接触しない状態のいずれかとなる。 As described above, when the accessory 200 is tilted around an axis parallel to the camera 100 in the Z direction, the contacts TC01 and TA01 and the contacts in the vicinity thereof come into contact with each other as shown in FIG. 3A, and the contacts TC21 and TA21 Either the contacts in the vicinity of and the contacts in the vicinity of the contact are not in contact with each other, or the contacts in the vicinity of the contacts TC21 and TA21 are in contact with each other and the contacts in the vicinity of the contacts TC01 and TA01 are not in contact with each other as shown in FIG. ..
 本実施形態では、接点TC06、TA06をアクセサリ200のカメラ100への装着検出に用いている。図3(a)に示すように接点TC01、TA01が接触している状態では、その近傍に配置された接点TC06、TA06も接触する場合が多い。このとき、通信要求接点TC11、TA11が離れている接点TC21、TA21の近傍に配置されていると、カメラ100へのアクセサリ200の装着が検出されたにもかかわらずカメラ100が通信要求信号/WAKEを検出できない状態になりやすい。 In this embodiment, the contacts TC06 and TA06 are used to detect the attachment of the accessory 200 to the camera 100. As shown in FIG. 3A, when the contacts TC01 and TA01 are in contact with each other, the contacts TC06 and TA06 arranged in the vicinity thereof often also come into contact with each other. At this time, if the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 are arranged in the vicinity of the contacts TC21 and TA21 which are separated from each other, the camera 100 has the communication request signal / WAKE even though the attachment of the accessory 200 to the camera 100 is detected. Is likely to be undetectable.
 一方、図3(b)に示すように接点TC21、TA21が接触している状態において接点TC06、TA06も接触している場合に、接点TC11、TA11が接点TC06、TA06よりも離れている接点TC01、TA01側に配置されていると、カメラ100へのアクセサリ200の装着が検出されたにもかかわらずカメラ100が通信要求信号/WAKEを検出できない状態になりやすい。 On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 3B, when the contacts TC21 and TA21 are in contact and the contacts TC06 and TA06 are also in contact, the contacts TC11 and TA11 are separated from the contacts TC06 and TA06. If the camera 100 is arranged on the TA01 side, the camera 100 tends to be unable to detect the communication request signal / WAKE even though the attachment of the accessory 200 to the camera 100 is detected.
 これらに対して、本実施形態では、以下のような接点配置を採用している。図1に示すように、装着検出接点TC06、TA06と通信要求接点TC11、TA11を、複数の接点TC01~TC21、TA01~TA21が配列された方向(以下、接点配列方向という)における最も一端側の接点TC01、TA01と最も他端側の接点TC21、TA21との間に配置している。この配置関係を第1の配置関係とする。また、装着検出接点TC06、TA06を、通信要求接点TC11、TA11と接点TC01、TA01との間に配置している。この配置関係を第2の配置関係とする。そして接点配列方向において、装着検出接点TC06、TA06と通信要求接点TC11、TA11との間の距離を、通信要求接点TC11、TA11と接点TC21、TA21との間の距離よりも短くしている。この配置関係を第3の配置関係とする。なお、本実施形態では、接点TC01~TC21、TA01~TA21は等ピッチで配列されているため、ここにいう接点間の距離は、該接点間に配置された他の接点の数と言い換えてもよく、距離が短い(長い)とは他の接点の数が少ない(多い)と言い換えることができる。 On the other hand, in this embodiment, the following contact arrangements are adopted. As shown in FIG. 1, the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 and the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 are located on the most one end side in the direction in which a plurality of contacts TC01 to TC21 and TA01 to TA21 are arranged (hereinafter referred to as contact arrangement direction). It is arranged between the contacts TC01 and TA01 and the contacts TC21 and TA21 on the farthest end side. This arrangement relationship is referred to as the first arrangement relationship. Further, the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 are arranged between the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 and the contacts TC01 and TA01. This arrangement relationship is referred to as a second arrangement relationship. Then, in the contact arrangement direction, the distance between the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 and the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 is shorter than the distance between the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 and the contacts TC21 and TA21. This arrangement relationship is referred to as a third arrangement relationship. In the present embodiment, the contacts TC01 to TC21 and TA01 to TA21 are arranged at equal pitches, so that the distance between the contacts here can be rephrased as the number of other contacts arranged between the contacts. Well, a short distance (long) can be rephrased as a small number (large) of other contacts.
 さらに本実施形態では、接点配列方向において、通信要求接点TC11、TA11と接点TC01、TA01との間の距離を、通信要求接点TC11、TA11と接点TC21、TA21との間の距離以下としている。この配置関係を第4の配置関係とする。特に本実施形態では、通信要求接点TC11、TA11を接点TC01~TC21、TC01~TC21の中央に配置して、通信要求接点TC11、TA11と接点TC01、TA01との間の距離と、通信要求接点TC11、TA11と接点TC21、TA21との間の距離を互いに等しくしている。なお、通信要求接点TC11、TA11を必ずしも接点TC01~TC21、TC01~TC21の中央に配置しなくてもよいが、中央付近に配置することが好ましい。 Further, in the present embodiment, the distance between the communication request contacts TC11, TA11 and the contacts TC01, TA01 is set to be equal to or less than the distance between the communication request contacts TC11, TA11 and the contacts TC21, TA21 in the contact arrangement direction. This arrangement relationship is referred to as a fourth arrangement relationship. In particular, in the present embodiment, the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 are arranged in the center of the contacts TC01 to TC21 and TC01 to TC21, the distance between the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 and the contacts TC01 and TA01, and the communication request contact TC11. , The distances between the TA11 and the contacts TC21 and TA21 are equal to each other. The communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 do not necessarily have to be arranged at the center of the contacts TC01 to TC21 and TC01 to TC21, but it is preferably arranged near the center.
 加えて、本実施形態では、接点配列方向において、装着検出接点TC06、TA06と接点TC01、TA01との間の距離を、装着検出接点TC06、TA06と通信要求接点TC11、TA11との間の距離以上としている。この配置関係を第5の配置関係とする。特に本実施形態では、装着検出接点TC06、TA06を通信要求接点TC11、TA11と接点TC01、TA01との間の中央に配置して、装着検出接点TC06、TA06と接点TC01、TA01との間の距離と、装着検出接点TC06、TA06と通信要求接点TC11、TA11との間の距離とを互いに等しくしている。なお、装着検出接点TC06、TA06を必ずしも通信要求接点TC11、TA11と接点TC01、TA01間の中央に配置しなくてもよいが、中央付近に配置することが好ましい。 In addition, in the present embodiment, the distance between the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 and the contacts TC01 and TA01 is equal to or greater than the distance between the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 and the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 in the contact arrangement direction. It is supposed to be. This arrangement relationship is referred to as a fifth arrangement relationship. In particular, in the present embodiment, the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 are arranged in the center between the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 and the contacts TC01 and TA01, and the distance between the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 and the contacts TC01 and TA01. And the distances between the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 and the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 are equal to each other. The mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 do not necessarily have to be arranged at the center between the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 and the contacts TC01 and TA01, but it is preferable to arrange them near the center.
 以上のような接点配置により、図3(a)に示す傾き状態で装着検出接点TC06、TA06が接触すれば通信要求接点TC11、TA11も接触する可能性が高くなり、図3(b)に示す傾き状態では通信要求接点TC11、TA11が接触しても装着検出接点TC06、TA06は接触しない可能性が高くなる。この結果、どちらの状態に傾いても、カメラ100へのアクセサリ200の装着検出が行われたにもかかわらずカメラ100が通信要求信号/WAKEを検出できないという状況の発生を低減することができる。 With the contact arrangement as described above, if the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 come into contact with each other in the tilted state shown in FIG. 3A, there is a high possibility that the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 also come into contact with each other, which is shown in FIG. In the tilted state, even if the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 come into contact with each other, there is a high possibility that the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 do not come into contact with each other. As a result, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which the camera 100 cannot detect the communication request signal / WAKE even though the attachment detection of the accessory 200 to the camera 100 has been performed regardless of which state is tilted.
 ここで、比較例として、接点TC06、TA06と接点TC11、TA11の位置が入れ替わった場合について説明する。すなわち、接点TC11、TA11を装着検出に用い、接点TC06,TA06を通信要求信号/WAKEの検出に用いる場合について説明する。この構成では、アクセサリ200がカメラ100に対して傾いて接点TC01、TA01およびその近傍の接点が接触しない状態になると、装着検出用の接点TC11、TA11は接触するが通信要求信号/WAKE用の接点TC06、TA06は接触せず通信エラーとなる場合がある。 Here, as a comparative example, a case where the positions of the contacts TC06 and TA06 and the contacts TC11 and TA11 are exchanged will be described. That is, a case where the contacts TC11 and TA11 are used for mounting detection and the contacts TC06 and TA06 are used for detecting the communication request signal / WAKE will be described. In this configuration, when the accessory 200 is tilted with respect to the camera 100 and the contacts TC01, TA01 and the contacts in the vicinity thereof do not come into contact with each other, the contacts TC11 and TA11 for mounting detection come into contact with each other, but the communication request signal / contact for WAKE. TC06 and TA06 may not come into contact with each other, resulting in a communication error.
 このため、通信エラーを回避するためには、本実施形態のように、通信要求信号/WAKE用の接点よりも装着検出用の接点を接点配列方向の一端側に配置することが好ましい。 Therefore, in order to avoid a communication error, it is preferable to arrange the contact for mounting detection on one end side in the contact arrangement direction rather than the contact for the communication request signal / WAKE as in the present embodiment.
 なお、後述する図20(a)~(c)および図23に示すようにアクセサリ200が複数の接点を、樹脂材料等の非導電性材料で形成される保持部材としての接続プラグ256で保持する構成において、該接続プラグ256が図中の下側(カメラ接続部141への接触方向)に向かって凸形状を有する場合がある。このような場合、複数の接点のうち接点配列方向の一端側の接点は接触するが、他端側の接点が接触しない状態がより発生しやすい。しかし、本実施形態のような接点配置を採用することで、カメラ100へのアクセサリ200の装着時に一部の接点が非接触となっても、通信エラーの発生を低減することができる。 As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (c) and FIG. 23, which will be described later, the accessory 200 holds a plurality of contacts with a connection plug 256 as a holding member formed of a non-conductive material such as a resin material. In the configuration, the connection plug 256 may have a convex shape toward the lower side (contact direction with the camera connection portion 141) in the drawing. In such a case, a state in which the contact on one end side in the contact arrangement direction of the plurality of contacts contacts but the contact on the other end side does not contact is more likely to occur. However, by adopting the contact arrangement as in the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of communication errors even if some of the contacts become non-contact when the accessory 200 is attached to the camera 100.
 さらに前述したように、カメラ100に対してY方向に平行な軸回りでアクセサリ200が捻れると、複数の接点のうち接点配列方向の一端側の接点は接触するが、他端側の接点が接触しない状態となり得る。このような状態がカメラ100へのアクセサリ200の装着過程において生じると、複数の接点の接触タイミングにずれが生じる。接触タイミングのずれが大きいと、カメラ100へのアクセサリ200の装着検出からWAKE検出までのタイムラグが長くなり、この結果、通信エラーと判断されるおそれがある。このとき、アクセサリ200の捻れの方向に応じて、接点TC01、TA01側が先に接触し始める状態になるか、接点TC21、TA21側が先に接触し始める状態になる。 Further, as described above, when the accessory 200 is twisted around an axis parallel to the camera 100 in the Y direction, the contact on one end side in the contact arrangement direction of the plurality of contacts contacts, but the contact on the other end side It can be in a non-contact state. When such a state occurs in the process of attaching the accessory 200 to the camera 100, the contact timings of the plurality of contacts are deviated. If the contact timing deviation is large, the time lag from the detection of attachment of the accessory 200 to the camera 100 to the detection of WAKE becomes long, and as a result, a communication error may be determined. At this time, depending on the twisting direction of the accessory 200, the contacts TC01 and TA01 sides start to come into contact first, or the contacts TC21 and TA21 sides start to come into contact first.
 接点TC01、TA01側から接触し始める場合において通信要求接点TC11、TA11が接点TC21,TA21に近いほど、アクセサリ200の装着検出から通信要求信号/WAKEの検出までのタイムラグが長くなる。タイムラグが長いほど、通信エラーと判断されやすくなる。一方、接点TC21,TA21側から接触し始める場合において装着検出接点TC06、TA06よりも接点TC01、TA01側に通信要求接点TC11、TA11が配置されていると、アクセサリ200の装着検出から通信要求信号/WAKEの検出までのタイムラグが生じる。 When contact starts from the contacts TC01 and TA01 sides, the closer the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 are to the contacts TC21 and TA21, the longer the time lag from the detection of attachment of the accessory 200 to the detection of the communication request signal / WAKE. The longer the time lag, the easier it is to determine a communication error. On the other hand, when the contact starts from the contact TC21, TA21 side, if the communication request contacts TC11, TA11 are arranged on the contact TC01, TA01 side rather than the mounting detection contact TC06, TA06, the communication request signal / from the mounting detection of the accessory 200. There is a time lag until the detection of WAKE.
 これらに対して、本実施形態では、前述した接点配置を採用することで、どちらの端側の接点から接触し始める場合でも、アクセサリ200の装着検出から通信要求信号/WAKEの検出までのタイムラグを短くすることができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting the contact arrangement described above, there is a time lag from the detection of mounting the accessory 200 to the detection of the communication request signal / WAKE, regardless of which contact starts to contact. Can be shortened.
 さらに本実施形態では、装着検出接点TC06、TA06と通信要求接点TC11、TA11との間の位置に、カメラ100とアクセサリ200間のSPI通信(第2の通信方式での通信)に用いられる接点TC07、TA07~TC10、TA10を配置している。また、通信要求接点TC11、TA11に対して装着検出接点TC06、TA06とは反対側にて近接する位置に、カメラ100とアクセサリ200間のI2C通信(第1の通信方式での通信)に用いられる接点TC12、TA12、TC13、TA13を配置している。 Further, in the present embodiment, the contact TC07 used for SPI communication (communication in the second communication method) between the camera 100 and the accessory 200 at a position between the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 and the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11. , TA07 to TC10, TA10 are arranged. Further, it is used for I2C communication (communication in the first communication method) between the camera 100 and the accessory 200 at a position close to the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 on the opposite side of the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06. The contacts TC12, TA12, TC13, and TA13 are arranged.
 カメラ100とアクセサリ200との間の通信は、カメラ100が通信要求信号/WAKEを検出した後で実行される。このため、カメラ100とアクセサリ200間で通信が実行されるまでは、該通信に用いられる接点の接触が確認されない。これに対して本実施形態では、装着検出接点TC06、TA06と通信要求接点TC11、TA11がそれぞれ接触していれば、それらの間および近傍に配置された通信用の接点TC07、TA07~TC10、TA10、TC12、TA12、TC13、TA13も接触しているとみなすことができる。 Communication between the camera 100 and the accessory 200 is executed after the camera 100 detects the communication request signal / WAKE. Therefore, until the communication between the camera 100 and the accessory 200 is executed, the contact of the contacts used for the communication is not confirmed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the mounting detection contacts TC06, TA06 and the communication request contacts TC11, TA11 are in contact with each other, the communication contacts TC07, TA07 to TC10, TA10 arranged between and in the vicinity thereof, respectively. , TC12, TA12, TC13, TA13 can also be considered to be in contact.
 なお、装着検出接点TC06、TA06と通信要求接点TC11、TA11の間の位置の方がより確実に接触しているとみなすことができるため、I2C通信よりも後に実行されるSPI通信に用いる接点を装着検出接点TC06、TA06と通信要求接点TC11、TA11の間の位置に配置することが好ましい。 Since it can be considered that the position between the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 and the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11 is more reliably contacted, the contact used for SPI communication executed after I2C communication is used. It is preferable to arrange it at a position between the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 and the communication request contacts TC11 and TA11.
 また、図4や後に説明に用いる図12および図20に示すように、アクセサリ200の構成としてカメラ100よりも接点数が少ない構成も考えられる。このような構成であっても装着検出接点と通信要求接点は必要な接点であり、カメラ100と接点数が等しい構成と同様の思想で装着検出接点と通信要求接点を配置することが好ましい。ただし、前述した第1~5の配置関係の一部を満たしていなくてもよい。 Further, as shown in FIG. 4 and FIGS. 12 and 20 which will be used later for explanation, a configuration in which the number of contacts is smaller than that of the camera 100 can be considered as the configuration of the accessory 200. Even in such a configuration, the mounting detection contact and the communication request contact are necessary contacts, and it is preferable to arrange the mounting detection contact and the communication request contact with the same idea as in the configuration in which the number of contacts is the same as that of the camera 100. However, it is not necessary to satisfy a part of the above-mentioned first to fifth arrangement relationships.
 例えば、図4に示すように接点TA21を有していない構成では、接点配列方向において、通信要求接点TA11と接点TA01との間の距離は、通信要求接点TA11と接点TA20との間の距離よりも長くなる。すなわち、前述した第4の配置関係を満たさない。また、例えば、図12に示すように接点TA01~TA03、TA19~21を有していない構成では、接点配列方向において、装着検出接点TA06と接点TA04との間の距離は、装着検出接点TA06と通信要求接点TA11との間の距離よりも短くなる。すなわち、前述した第5の配置関係を満たさない。 For example, in the configuration without the contact TA21 as shown in FIG. 4, the distance between the communication request contact TA11 and the contact TA01 is larger than the distance between the communication request contact TA11 and the contact TA20 in the contact arrangement direction. Will also be longer. That is, it does not satisfy the above-mentioned fourth arrangement relationship. Further, for example, in a configuration having no contacts TA01 to TA03 and TA19 to 21 as shown in FIG. 12, the distance between the mounting detection contact TA06 and the contact TA04 in the contact arrangement direction is set to the mounting detection contact TA06. It is shorter than the distance to the communication request contact TA11. That is, it does not satisfy the above-mentioned fifth arrangement relationship.
 以上のように、アクセサリ200の端となる接点の位置がカメラ100の端となる接点の位置と異なる構成では、前述した第1~5の配置関係の一部を満たさない場合がある。そのような場合、装着状態にてカメラ100の端となる接点と対向する位置をアクセサリ200の端となる接点の位置と仮定して前述した第1~5の配置関係を満たすように装着検出接点と通信要求接点を配置すればよい。あるいは、図20に示す突起部256aのように、端となる接点からの距離の代わりに、突起部256aからの距離を考慮して前述した第1~5の配置関係を満たすように装着検出接点と通信要求接点を配置すればよい。 図5(a)のフローチャートは、アクセサリ200がカメラ100に装着されたときにカメラ制御回路101が実行する処理を示している。 As described above, in a configuration in which the position of the contact point at the end of the accessory 200 is different from the position of the contact point at the end of the camera 100, a part of the above-mentioned first to fifth arrangement relationships may not be satisfied. In such a case, it is assumed that the position facing the contact point at the end of the camera 100 in the mounted state is the position of the contact point at the end of the accessory 200, and the mounting detection contact is satisfied with the above-mentioned first to fifth arrangement relationships. And communication request contacts may be arranged. Alternatively, as in the protrusion 256a shown in FIG. 20, the mounting detection contact so as to satisfy the above-mentioned first to fifth arrangement relationships in consideration of the distance from the protrusion 256a instead of the distance from the contact at the end. And communication request contacts may be arranged. The flowchart of FIG. 5A shows a process executed by the camera control circuit 101 when the accessory 200 is attached to the camera 100.
 S401において、装着検出手段としてのカメラ制御回路101は、アクセサリ装着検出信号/ACC_DETの信号レベルをモニタし、アクセサリ200が装着されているか否かを判定する。カメラ制御回路101は、信号レベルがHiであればアクセサリ200は未装着であるとしてS401に戻って再び検出を行い、信号レベルがLoであればアクセサリ200が装着されたとしてS402に進む。 In S401, the camera control circuit 101 as a mounting detection means monitors the signal level of the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET and determines whether or not the accessory 200 is mounted. If the signal level is Hi, the camera control circuit 101 returns to S401 and performs detection again, assuming that the accessory 200 is not attached, and if the signal level is Lo, proceeds to S402 assuming that the accessory 200 is attached.
 S402では、カメラ制御回路101は、アクセサリ用電源回路A131の出力をオンするために電源制御信号CNT_VACC1をHiレベルにしてS403に進む。アクセサリ用電源回路A131は、電源制御信号CNT_VACC1がHiになることに応じてアクセサリ電源VACCを出力する。 In S402, the camera control circuit 101 sets the power supply control signal CNT_VACC1 to Hi level in order to turn on the output of the accessory power supply circuit A131, and proceeds to S403. The accessory power supply circuit A131 outputs the accessory power supply VACC in response to the power supply control signal CNT_VACC1 becoming Hi.
 S403では、カメラ制御回路101は、過電流検出信号DET_OVCの信号レベルをモニタし、過電流が流れているか否かを判定する。カメラ制御回路101は、信号レベルがLoであれば過電流は流れていないとしてS404に進み、信号レベルがHiであれば過電流が流れたとしてS405に進んでエラー処理を行う。 In S403, the camera control circuit 101 monitors the signal level of the overcurrent detection signal DET_OVC and determines whether or not an overcurrent is flowing. If the signal level is Lo, the camera control circuit 101 proceeds to S404 assuming that no overcurrent has flowed, and if the signal level is Hi, proceeds to S405 assuming that an overcurrent has flowed and performs error processing.
 図6(a)は、図5(a)の処理においてS404まで進んだ場合の上記信号の変化を模式的に示している。IACCはアクセサリ電源VACCの電流である。S402において電源制御信号CNT_VACC1がHiにされた後にアクセサリ電源VACCが正常に立ち上がっているため、過電流検出信号DET_OVCはLoレベルのままとなっている。 FIG. 6 (a) schematically shows a change in the above signal when the process proceeds to S404 in the process of FIG. 5 (a). IACC is the current of the accessory power supply VACC. Since the accessory power supply VACC normally starts up after the power supply control signal CNT_VACC1 is set to Hi in S402, the overcurrent detection signal DET_OVC remains at the Lo level.
 図6(b)は、図5(a)の処理においてS405まで進んだ場合の上記信号の変化を模式的に示している。S402において電源制御信号CNT_VACC1がHiにされた後にIACCに過電流が流れたために、過電流検出信号DET_OVCがHiレベルに変化してカメラ制御回路101に通知する。カメラ制御回路101は、過電流検出信号DET_OVCの通知を受けると、エラー処理としてアクセサリ用電源回路A131,B132の出力をオフにしてアクセサリ200への電源供給を停止させる。このように、アクセサリ電源VACCに過電流が流れた場合でも、カメラ制御回路101が過電流を検出して安全にシステムを停止させることが可能となっている。 FIG. 6 (b) schematically shows a change in the above signal when the process proceeds to S405 in the process of FIG. 5 (a). Since the overcurrent flows through the IACC after the power supply control signal CNT_VACC1 is set to Hi in S402, the overcurrent detection signal DET_OVC changes to the Hi level and notifies the camera control circuit 101. Upon receiving the notification of the overcurrent detection signal DET_OVC, the camera control circuit 101 turns off the outputs of the accessory power supply circuits A131 and B132 as error processing to stop the power supply to the accessory 200. In this way, even when an overcurrent flows through the accessory power supply VACC, the camera control circuit 101 can detect the overcurrent and safely stop the system.
 通常ではアクセサリ電源VACCに異常電流が流れるようなケースは、カメラ100とアクセサリ200の故障が想定されるが、カメラ接続部141とアクセサリ接続部211は外部に露出しているために、金属片等の異物が付着して隣り合う接点同士がショートする可能性もある。 Normally, in the case where an abnormal current flows through the accessory power supply VACC, it is assumed that the camera 100 and the accessory 200 are out of order, but since the camera connection portion 141 and the accessory connection portion 211 are exposed to the outside, a metal piece or the like There is a possibility that foreign matter may adhere to the adjacent contacts and cause a short circuit.
 本実施形態では、アクセサリ電源VACCは電圧3.3Vであるのに対して、カメラマイコン電源VMCU_Cとアクセサリマイコン電源VMCU_Aは電圧1.8Vである。このため、仮に電圧1.8Vで動作している電気素子に電圧3.3Vが印加されると、該電気素子がダメージを受ける懸念がある。また、ショート後の挙動は該電気素子の特性によるため、カメラ制御回路101は端子間のショートを必ずしも検出できない可能性がある。例えば、I2C通信信号は通信待機状態には信号がHiレベルであるため、信号電圧1.8V以上の3.3V電圧とショートをしたとしても、接続先の電気素子の特性によっては異常を検出できない場合がある。 In the present embodiment, the accessory power supply VACC has a voltage of 3.3 V, whereas the camera microcomputer power supply VMCU_C and the accessory microcomputer power supply VMCU_A have a voltage of 1.8 V. Therefore, if a voltage of 3.3 V is applied to an electric element operating at a voltage of 1.8 V, there is a concern that the electric element may be damaged. Further, since the behavior after the short circuit depends on the characteristics of the electric element, the camera control circuit 101 may not always be able to detect the short circuit between the terminals. For example, since the I2C communication signal is at the Hi level in the communication standby state, even if it is short-circuited with a 3.3V voltage having a signal voltage of 1.8V or more, an abnormality cannot be detected depending on the characteristics of the connected electric element. In some cases.
 これに対し、本実施形態では、アクセサリ電源VACCの接点TC05,TA05の両隣のうち一方にGND接点TC04,TA04を配置し、他方にはアクセサリ装着検出信号/ACC_DETの接点TC06,TA06を配置している。先に説明したようにアクセサリ装着検出信号/ACC_DETはアクセサリ200内でGNDに接続されている。このため、接点間のショートが発生した場合でも、1.8Vで動作している素子に3.3Vが印加されることなく、過電流を検出して安全にシステムを停止することができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the GND contacts TC04 and TA04 are arranged on one of the two sides of the accessory power supply VACC contacts TC05 and TA05, and the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET contacts TC06 and TA06 are arranged on the other side. There is. As described above, the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET is connected to the GND in the accessory 200. Therefore, even if a short circuit occurs between the contacts, the overcurrent can be detected and the system can be safely stopped without applying 3.3V to the element operating at 1.8V.
 また、先に述べたように、GND接点が接続していない状態でアクセサリ電源VACCを供給すると、アクセサリ200の基準電位が不安定になり、その結果、各回路や電気素子がダメージを受けるおそれがある。機器操作上、コネクタ端子の接触が不安定になるほどの外力が加わる場合がある。これに対して、本実施形態のようにアクセサリ電源VACC接点とGND接点を隣接させることで、アクセサリ電源VACC接点とGND接点を離れた端子に配置するよりも、相対的にアクセサリ電源VACC接点だけが接続している状態になりにくくすることができる。 Further, as described above, if the accessory power supply VACC is supplied when the GND contact is not connected, the reference potential of the accessory 200 becomes unstable, and as a result, each circuit and the electric element may be damaged. be. When operating the device, an external force may be applied that makes the contact of the connector terminals unstable. On the other hand, by placing the accessory power supply VACC contact and the GND contact adjacent to each other as in the present embodiment, only the accessory power supply VACC contact is relatively located, rather than arranging the accessory power supply VACC contact and the GND contact at separate terminals. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to be connected.
 なお、本実施形態ではアクセサリ装着検出信号/ACC_DETをアクセサリ200内でGND接続しているが、図9に示すアクセサリ200のように、抵抗素子Rd231を介してGND接続する構成としてもよい。抵抗Rd231を介したGND接続とすることで、ショート電流を小さくすることができる。 In the present embodiment, the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET is GND-connected in the accessory 200, but as in the accessory 200 shown in FIG. 9, the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET may be GND-connected via the resistance element Rd231. The short-circuit current can be reduced by connecting to GND via the resistor Rd231.
 この場合は、カメラマイコン電源VMCU_Cの電圧1.8Vを抵抗素子Rp134と抵抗素子Rd231で分圧した電圧(Rd/(Rp+Rd))×1.8Vが、カメラ制御回路101のLoレベル閾値(Vil)を満足する抵抗値の抵抗素子Rd231を選定する必要がある。例えば、カメラ制御回路101のLowレベル検出閾値(Vil)が電源電圧の0.33倍である場合は、抵抗素子Rd231の抵抗値は抵抗素子Rp134(10kΩ)の1/2以下とする必要がある。図9の例では、抵抗素子Rd231の抵抗値を5kΩとしている。 In this case, the voltage (Rd / (Rp + Rd)) × 1.8V obtained by dividing the voltage of 1.8V of the camera microcomputer power supply VMCU_C by the resistance element Rp134 and the resistance element Rd231 is the Lo level threshold (Vil) of the camera control circuit 101. It is necessary to select a resistance element Rd231 having a resistance value that satisfies the above. For example, when the Low level detection threshold value (Vil) of the camera control circuit 101 is 0.33 times the power supply voltage, the resistance value of the resistance element Rd231 needs to be 1/2 or less of the resistance element Rp134 (10 kΩ). .. In the example of FIG. 9, the resistance value of the resistance element Rd231 is set to 5 kΩ.
 図5(b)は、図9に示した構成を有するアクセサリ200がカメラ100に装着されたときにカメラ制御回路101が実行する処理を示している。S411~S413はそれぞれ、図5(a)に示したS401~S403と同じであるため説明を省略する。 FIG. 5B shows a process executed by the camera control circuit 101 when the accessory 200 having the configuration shown in FIG. 9 is attached to the camera 100. Since S411 to S413 are the same as S401 to S403 shown in FIG. 5A, the description thereof will be omitted.
 S413の後のS414では、カメラ制御回路101は、アクセサリ装着検出信号/ACC_DETの信号レベルをモニタし、アクセサリ装着検出信号/ACC_DETの接点TC06,TA06がアクセサリ電源VACCの接点TC05,TA05とショートしているか否かを判定する。カメラ制御回路101は、信号レベルがLoであればショートしていないとしてS415に進み、信号レベルがHiであればショートしているとしてS416に進んでエラー処理を行う。 In S414 after S413, the camera control circuit 101 monitors the signal level of the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET, and the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET contacts TC06 and TA06 are short-circuited with the accessory power supply VACC contacts TC05 and TA05. Judge whether or not. If the signal level is Lo, the camera control circuit 101 proceeds to S415 as if it is not short-circuited, and if the signal level is Hi, it proceeds to S416 as if it is short-circuited and performs error processing.
 図6(c)は、抵抗素子Rd231(5kΩ)を追加した図9の構成を有するアクセサリ200において、アクセサリ電源VACCとアクセサリ装着検出信号/ACC_DETがショートした場合の上記信号の状態を模式的に示している。S402において電源制御信号CNT_VACC1がHiにされた後、抵抗素子Rd231により電流が制限されるためにIACCには過電流が流れない。 FIG. 6C schematically shows the state of the above signal when the accessory power supply VACC and the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET are short-circuited in the accessory 200 having the configuration of FIG. 9 to which the resistance element Rd231 (5 kΩ) is added. ing. After the power supply control signal CNT_VACC1 is set to Hi in S402, an overcurrent does not flow in the IACC because the current is limited by the resistance element Rd231.
 一方、アクセサリ装着検出信号/ACC_DETにはアクセサリ電源VACCの電圧が印加されることになる。カメラ制御回路101は、割り込み処理等によりアクセサリ装着検出信号/ACC_DETの信号レベルがHiになり次第、エラー処理として電源制御信号CNT_VACC1をLoにしてアクセサリ電源VACCの出力(アクセサリ200への電源供給)を停止させる。これにより1.8Vで動作している素子の端子に3.3Vを印加し続けることなく、安全にシステムを停止することができる。 On the other hand, the voltage of the accessory power supply VACC is applied to the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET. As soon as the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET signal level becomes Hi due to interrupt processing or the like, the camera control circuit 101 sets the power control signal CNT_VACC1 to Lo as error processing and outputs the accessory power supply VACC (power supply to the accessory 200). Stop it. As a result, the system can be safely stopped without continuously applying 3.3V to the terminals of the element operating at 1.8V.
 また、図10に示すように、アクセサリ200を、アクセサリ装着検出信号/ACC_DETがスイッチ手段としてのNPN型トランジスタ212を介してアクセサリ制御回路201によりLoレベル(GND電位)となるように制御される構成としてもよい。図1に示す構成では、アクセサリ200をカメラ100に装着すればカメラ制御回路101はアクセサリ200を常に検出できるが、図10の構成にすればアクセサリ制御回路201が任意のタイミングでアクセサリ200のカメラ100への装着を通知することができる。 Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the accessory 200 is controlled so that the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET becomes Lo level (GND potential) by the accessory control circuit 201 via an NPN transistor 212 as a switch means. May be. In the configuration shown in FIG. 1, if the accessory 200 is attached to the camera 100, the camera control circuit 101 can always detect the accessory 200. However, in the configuration shown in FIG. 10, the accessory control circuit 201 can detect the accessory 200 at an arbitrary timing. It is possible to notify the attachment to the camera.
 さらに、図11に示すように、アクセサリ200を、NPN型トランジスタ212に直列に抵抗素子Rd231を接続した構成としてもよい。この場合は、図1の構成と同様に、抵抗値は抵抗素子Rp134(10kΩ)の1/2以下とする必要がある。 Further, as shown in FIG. 11, the accessory 200 may be configured by connecting the resistance element Rd231 in series with the NPN transistor 212. In this case, the resistance value needs to be 1/2 or less of the resistance element Rp134 (10 kΩ) as in the configuration of FIG.
 以上説明したように、本実施形態によれば、電源接点とこれに隣接する接点とがショートしても、カメラ100とアクセサリ200からなるシステムの安全性を保ち、それらに対するダメージを抑えることができる。 As described above, according to the present embodiment, even if the power supply contact and the contact adjacent thereto are short-circuited, the safety of the system including the camera 100 and the accessory 200 can be maintained, and damage to them can be suppressed. ..
 図7は、アクセサリ200の種類(ここでは、マイク機器とストロボ機器)ごとに接点TC14~TC17と接点TA14~TA17に接続される機能信号としてのFNC1信号~FNC4信号の機能の例を示している。 FIG. 7 shows an example of the functions of the FNC1 signal to the FNC4 signal as the functional signals connected to the contacts TC14 to TC17 and the contacts TA14 to TA17 for each type of the accessory 200 (here, the microphone device and the strobe device). ..
 マイク機器においては、FNC2信号~FNC4信号をデジタル音声(I2S: Inter-IC Sound規格)データバスとして使用して音声データの転送を行う。図8(a)は、アクセサリ200がマイク機器である場合における機能回路206の構成例を示している。 In the microphone device, the FNC2 signal to the FNC4 signal are used as a digital audio (I2S: Inter-IC Sound standard) data bus to transfer audio data. FIG. 8A shows a configuration example of the functional circuit 206 when the accessory 200 is a microphone device.
 機能回路206内の音声処理回路206A1は、マイク206A2から入力された音声信号をデジタル音声(I2S)データ形式に変換するコーデック回路であり、アクセサリ制御回路201によって制御される。アクセサリ制御回路201は、音声処理回路206A1を制御することでサンプリング周波数および分解能を設定可能である。本実施形態では、サンプリング周波数は48kHz、分解能は32bitとする。マイク206A2は、例えば、MEMS-ICマイクやエレクトレットコンデンサマイクである。 The voice processing circuit 206A1 in the function circuit 206 is a codec circuit that converts a voice signal input from the microphone 206A2 into a digital voice (I2S) data format, and is controlled by the accessory control circuit 201. The accessory control circuit 201 can set the sampling frequency and the resolution by controlling the voice processing circuit 206A1. In this embodiment, the sampling frequency is 48 kHz and the resolution is 32 bits. The microphone 206A2 is, for example, a MEMS-IC microphone or an electret condenser microphone.
 TA14は、FNC1信号でI2Sデータバスとして非使用であり、GNDに接続されている。本実施形態では非使用の機能信号をGND接続にしているが、これに限らず、電源電位や信号のLレベル(ロー電位)またはHレベル(ハイ電位)のようにGND電位(0V)以外の安定した電位である基準電位への接続としてもよい。 TA14 is an FNC1 signal that is not used as an I2S data bus and is connected to GND. In this embodiment, the unused functional signal is connected to GND, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other than the GND potential (0V) such as the power potential and the L level (low potential) or H level (high potential) of the signal. It may be connected to a reference potential which is a stable potential.
 TA15(DATA接点)に接続されたFNC2信号は、音声データ信号(DATA)であり、アクセサリ200からカメラ100に対して出力される信号である。 The FNC2 signal connected to the TA15 (DATA contact) is an audio data signal (DATA), which is a signal output from the accessory 200 to the camera 100.
 TA16(LRCLK接点)に接続されたFNC3信号は、音声チャンネルクロック信号(LRCLK)であり、アクセサリ200からカメラ100に対して出力される信号である。 The FNC3 signal connected to the TA16 (LRCLK contact) is an audio channel clock signal (LRCLK), which is a signal output from the accessory 200 to the camera 100.
 TA17(BCLK接点)に接続されたFNC4信号は、音声ビットクロック信号(BCLK)であり、カメラ100からアクセサリ200に対して出力される信号である。 The FNC4 signal connected to the TA17 (BCLK contact) is an audio bit clock signal (BCLK), which is a signal output from the camera 100 to the accessory 200.
 本実施形態では、上述したようにサンプリング周波数は48kHz、分解能は32bitであるため、LRCLKの周波数は48kHz、BCLKの周波数は3.072MHzとなる。DATAはCLKの1/2周期である、1.536MHzが最大周波数となる。 In the present embodiment, since the sampling frequency is 48 kHz and the resolution is 32 bits as described above, the LRCLK frequency is 48 kHz and the BCLK frequency is 3.072 MHz. The maximum frequency of DATA is 1.536 MHz, which is 1/2 cycle of CLK.
 本実施形態の接点配置においては、機能信号が接続される機能信号接点のうち周波数が最も高くなるFNC4信号(BCLK)が接続される接点TA17,TC17の隣に、基準電位であるGND電位に接続される基準電位接点TA18,TC18が配置されている。アクシューインターフェースへの信号配線はフレキシブル基板を用いた構成が一般的である。また、製品コストを抑えるために、フレキシブル基板が片面仕様の場合もあり、接点配置と同じ並びで基板配線がされる。本実施形態においては、機能信号のうち周波数が最も高くなる信号が接続された機能信号接点の隣に基準電位接点であるGND接点が配置されている。これにより、機能信号接点からの放射ノイズ(EMI)および他の接点に接続される信号への干渉やI2Sデータバス以外の信号とのクロストークを抑制することができる。 In the contact arrangement of the present embodiment, the contact potential is connected to the GND potential, which is the reference potential, next to the contacts TA17 and TC17 to which the FNC4 signal (BCLK) having the highest frequency is connected among the functional signal contacts to which the functional signal is connected. Reference potential contacts TA18 and TC18 are arranged. The signal wiring to the access interface is generally configured using a flexible substrate. Further, in order to reduce the product cost, the flexible board may have a single-sided specification, and the board wiring is performed in the same arrangement as the contact arrangement. In the present embodiment, the GND contact, which is a reference potential contact, is arranged next to the functional signal contact to which the signal having the highest frequency among the functional signals is connected. This makes it possible to suppress radiation noise (EMI) from the functional signal contact, interference with signals connected to other contacts, and crosstalk with signals other than the I2S data bus.
 なお、本実施形態では周波数が最も高くなるFNC4信号(BCLK)が接続する接点TA17,TC17の隣の接点TA18,TC18を基準電位であるGND電位に接続にしているが、これに限らず、GND電位以外の安定した基準電位への接続であっても同様な効果が得られる。 In the present embodiment, the contacts TA17 and TC18 next to the contacts TA17 and TC17 to which the FNC4 signal (BCLK) having the highest frequency is connected are connected to the GND potential which is the reference potential, but the present invention is not limited to GND. The same effect can be obtained even if the connection is made to a stable reference potential other than the potential.
 図8(b)は、図8(a)に対して音声データを増やす場合の構成を示す例である。音声データを増やすのは、チャンネル数や分解能を増やすことを目的としている。 FIG. 8B is an example showing a configuration in which voice data is increased with respect to FIG. 8A. The purpose of increasing audio data is to increase the number of channels and resolution.
 TA17に接続されたFNC4信号は、音声ビットクロック信号(BCLK)であり、図8(a)と同様としている。 The FNC4 signal connected to the TA17 is an audio bit clock signal (BCLK), which is the same as in FIG. 8A.
 一方、TA14に接続されたFNC3信号は、音声チャンネルクロック信号(LRCLK)であり、アクセサリ200からカメラ100に対して出力される信号である。 On the other hand, the FNC3 signal connected to the TA14 is an audio channel clock signal (LRCLK), which is a signal output from the accessory 200 to the camera 100.
 TA15に接続されたFNC2信号は、音声データ信号(DATA2)であり、アクセサリ200からカメラ100に対して出力される信号である。 The FNC2 signal connected to the TA15 is an audio data signal (DATA2), which is a signal output from the accessory 200 to the camera 100.
 TA16に接続されたFNC1信号は、音声データ信号(DATA2)として、アクセサリ200からカメラ100に対して出力する信号として動作する。 The FNC1 signal connected to the TA16 operates as a voice data signal (DATA2) as a signal output from the accessory 200 to the camera 100.
 このように、音声データ量を増やすために音声データ信号を追加して、2つの信号を使う構成とする場合に、周波数が高い信号から順番にGND端子の近くに配置することで、相対的にクロストークを防ぐ効果が高い構成とすることができる。 In this way, when an audio data signal is added to increase the amount of audio data and two signals are used, the signals with the highest frequency are arranged closer to the GND terminal in order, so that they are relatively relative. The configuration can be highly effective in preventing crosstalk.
 図8(c)は、アクセサリ200がストロボ機器である場合における機能回路206の構成例を示している。機能回路206内の発光回路206B1は、IGBTやトリガコイル等によって構成されるストロボ発光回路であり、発光部206B2の発光制御を行う。発光部206B2は、キセノン管等で構成され、被写体に照射される照明光を発する。充電回路206B3は、トランス、スイッチングFETおよびコンデンサ等で構成され、発光部206B2を発光させるための電荷を蓄積する。 FIG. 8C shows a configuration example of the functional circuit 206 when the accessory 200 is a strobe device. The light emitting circuit 206B1 in the functional circuit 206 is a strobe light emitting circuit composed of an IGBT, a trigger coil, and the like, and controls light emission of the light emitting unit 206B2. The light emitting unit 206B2 is composed of a xenon tube or the like and emits illumination light to irradiate the subject. The charging circuit 206B3 is composed of a transformer, a switching FET, a capacitor, and the like, and accumulates electric charges for causing the light emitting unit 206B2 to emit light.
 TA14に接続されたFNC1信号は、発光部206B2の発光タイミングを制御するための発光同期信号(STARTX)であり、カメラ100からアクセサリ200に対して出力される信号である。FNC2信号~FNC4信号は、ストロボ機器では非使用であり、これらの接点には信号が接続されていない。 The FNC1 signal connected to the TA14 is a light emission synchronization signal (STARTX) for controlling the light emission timing of the light emitting unit 206B2, and is a signal output from the camera 100 to the accessory 200. The FNC2 signal to FNC4 signal are not used in the strobe device, and no signal is connected to these contacts.
 本実施形態では非使用の機能信号接点を非接続(OPEN)にしているが、これに限らず、接点TA15~TA17の接続先である接点TC15~TC17に合わせて、電源電位や信号のLレベルまたはHレベルのような安定した基準電位への接続としてもよい。 In the present embodiment, the unused functional signal contacts are not connected (OPEN), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the power potential and the L level of the signal are adjusted according to the contacts TC15 to TC17 to which the contacts TA15 to TA17 are connected. Alternatively, it may be connected to a stable reference potential such as H level.
 ストロボ機器においては、機能信号のうち使用するのはFNC1信号のみである。また、発光同期信号(STARTX)は周期的に発生する信号ではないが、マイク機器の接続時にはカメラ100がFNC1信号にGNDを割り当てることで、カメラ制御回路101の構成が複雑にならないようにすることができる。 In the strobe device, only the FNC1 signal is used among the functional signals. Further, although the light emission synchronization signal (STARTX) is not a signal generated periodically, the camera 100 allocates GND to the FNC1 signal when the microphone device is connected so that the configuration of the camera control circuit 101 is not complicated. Can be done.
 以下、本実施形態の接点配置のさらなる特徴について説明する。第1の信号接点としての接点TC12,TA12に接続されるSDA(第1の信号)と、第2の信号接点としての接点TC13,TA13に接続されるSCL(第2の信号)はともにI2C通信用の信号である。これら信号はオープンドレイン通信によって伝達される。SDAもSCLも共にカメラマイコン電源VMCU_Cにプルアップされているため、通信待機時においては比較的インピーダンスが高い信号であり、クロストークの影響を受けやすい。 Hereinafter, further features of the contact arrangement of the present embodiment will be described. The SDA (first signal) connected to the contacts TC12 and TA12 as the first signal contact and the SCL (second signal) connected to the contacts TC13 and TA13 as the second signal contact are both I2C communication. It is a signal for. These signals are transmitted by open drain communication. Since both SDA and SCL are pulled up to the camera microcomputer power supply VMCU_C, the signal has a relatively high impedance during communication standby, and is easily affected by crosstalk.
 このため、本実施形態では、SDA接点TC12,TA12の隣の第4の信号接点としての接点TC11,TA11に通信要求信号(第4の信号)/WAKEが割り当てられている。前述したように通信要求信号/WAKEは、アクセサリ200からカメラ100に対して通信要求を行う信号である。 Therefore, in the present embodiment, the communication request signal (fourth signal) / WAKE is assigned to the contacts TC11 and TA11 as the fourth signal contacts next to the SDA contacts TC12 and TA12. As described above, the communication request signal / WAKE is a signal for making a communication request from the accessory 200 to the camera 100.
 図15(a)は、アクセサリ200からカメラ100に対して通信要求を行い、I2C通信を実施するタイミングを示す。図15(a)に示すように、通信要求信号/WAKEは、
SCLおよびSDAによるI2C通信の前に、信号レベルがHiレベルからLoレベルへと変化する。この変化に応じてI2C通信が行われるためである。そこで、通信要求信号/WAKEの接点TC11、TA11を、I2C通信のためのSDA接点およびSDA接点と隣接して配置させることで、通信要求信号/WAKEのSDAに対するクロストークが生じないようにすることができる。
FIG. 15A shows the timing at which the accessory 200 makes a communication request to the camera 100 and the I2C communication is performed. As shown in FIG. 15A, the communication request signal / WAKE is
Prior to I2C communication by SCL and SDA, the signal level changes from Hi level to Lo level. This is because I2C communication is performed in response to this change. Therefore, by arranging the communication request signal / WAKE contacts TC11 and TA11 adjacent to the SDA contact and the SDA contact for I2C communication, crosstalk to the communication request signal / WAKE SDA is prevented from occurring. Can be done.
 また、図15(a)に示すように、I2C通信の後に通信要求信号/WAKEの信号レベルをLoレベルからHiレベルへと変化させるように制御することにより、通信要求信号/WAKEのSDAに対するクロストークが生じないようにすることができる。 Further, as shown in FIG. 15 (a), the communication request signal / WAKE crosses the SDA by controlling the communication request signal / WAKE signal level to be changed from the Lo level to the Hi level after the I2C communication. It is possible to prevent talk from occurring.
 また、SCL接点TC13,TA13の隣の第3の信号接点としての接点TC14,TA14にはFNC1信号が割り当てられている。前述したようにマイク機器においてはFNC1信号にGNDが割り当てられているため、SCLに対するクロストークも生じないようにすることができる。 Further, the FNC1 signal is assigned to the contacts TC14 and TA14 as the third signal contact next to the SCL contacts TC13 and TA13. As described above, in the microphone device, since GND is assigned to the FNC1 signal, crosstalk to the SCL can be prevented from occurring.
 さらにストロボ機器においては、SCL接点TC13,TA13の隣の接点TC14,TA14にFNC1信号としての発光同期信号(STARTX:第3の信号)が割り当てられる。図15(b)は、アクセサリ200からカメラ100に対して通信要求を行い、I2C通信とストロボ発光を行うタイミングを示している。図15(b)に示すように、発光同期信号が出力されるタイミング(期間)では、ストロボ発光の制御を最優先に処理するためにカメラ100とアクセサリ200間でI2C通信を行わない。言い換えれば、発光同期信号は、I2C通信中の前(または後)に信号レベルが変化するが、I2C通信中は信号レベルが変化しない信号である。これにより、発光同期信号のSCLに対するクロストークが生じないようにすることができる。 Further, in the strobe device, a light emission synchronization signal (STARTX: third signal) as an FNC1 signal is assigned to the contacts TC14 and TA14 adjacent to the SCL contacts TC13 and TA13. FIG. 15B shows the timing at which the accessory 200 makes a communication request to the camera 100, and the I2C communication and the strobe light emission are performed. As shown in FIG. 15B, at the timing (period) when the light emission synchronization signal is output, I2C communication is not performed between the camera 100 and the accessory 200 in order to process the control of the strobe light emission with the highest priority. In other words, the emission synchronization signal is a signal whose signal level changes before (or after) during I2C communication, but the signal level does not change during I2C communication. This makes it possible to prevent crosstalk of the emission synchronization signal with respect to SCL.
 このように、本実施形態では、SDA接点とSCL接点の両隣のうち一方にSTARTX接点を配置し、他方に/WAKE接点を配置することで、良好なI2C通信を可能としている。 As described above, in the present embodiment, good I2C communication is enabled by arranging the STARTX contact on one of the sides of the SDA contact and the SCL contact and arranging the / WAKE contact on the other.
 また、本実施形態では、SDA接点TC12,TA12の隣の接点TC11,TA11に接続される通信要求信号/WAKEを、SDAと同様にオープンドレイン方式の信号としている。通信要求信号/WAKEをプッシュプル方式にした場合と比較して、通信要求信号/WAKEの信号レベルが変化したときのSDAに対するクロストークを抑えることができる。 Further, in the present embodiment, the communication request signal / WAKE connected to the contacts TC11 and TA11 adjacent to the SDA contacts TC12 and TA12 is an open drain type signal like the SDA. Compared with the case where the communication request signal / WAKE is a push-pull system, it is possible to suppress crosstalk to the SDA when the signal level of the communication request signal / WAKE changes.
 SCLK接点TC07,TA07に接続されたSCLKは、SPI通信のクロック信号であり、本実施形態では1MHzの駆動周波数で動作する。本実施形態においては、SCLK接点TC07,TA07の隣の装着検出接点TC06,TA06をアクセサリ装着検出信号/ACC_DETの伝達に用いる。先にも述べたようにアクセサリ装着検出信号/ACC_DETはカメラ100にアクセサリ200が装着されるとGND相当の電位となる信号である。このため、このような接点配置にすることで、SCLKとSPIバス以外の信号とのクロストークを防ぐことができる。 The SCLK connected to the SCLK contacts TC07 and TA07 is a clock signal for SPI communication, and operates at a drive frequency of 1 MHz in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the mounting detection contacts TC06 and TA06 next to the SCLK contacts TC07 and TA07 are used for transmitting the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET. As described above, the accessory mounting detection signal / ACC_DET is a signal that becomes a potential equivalent to GND when the accessory 200 is mounted on the camera 100. Therefore, by adopting such a contact arrangement, it is possible to prevent crosstalk between SCLK and signals other than the SPI bus.
 SCLK接点TC07,TA07のもう一方の隣の接点TC08、TA08に接続されたMOSIは、SPI通信によってカメラ制御回路101からアクセサリ制御回路201へ送信されるデータ信号である。一般にSPI通信におけるMOSIの出力レベルが変化するタイミングは、SCLKの出力レベルが変化するタイミングに同期している。このため、SCLK接点TC07,TA07の隣にMOSI接点TC08、TA08を配置することで、SCLKとMOSIの相互間でのクロストークを抑制することができる。 The MOSI connected to the contacts TC08 and TA08 next to the SCLK contacts TC07 and TA07 is a data signal transmitted from the camera control circuit 101 to the accessory control circuit 201 by SPI communication. Generally, the timing at which the MOSI output level in SPI communication changes is synchronized with the timing at which the SCLK output level changes. Therefore, by arranging the MOSI contacts TC08 and TA08 next to the SCLK contacts TC07 and TA07, crosstalk between SCLK and MOSI can be suppressed.
 MOSI接点TC08、TA08のもう一方の隣の接点TC09、TA09に接続されたMISOは、SPI通信においてアクセサリ制御回路201からカメラ制御回路101に送信されるデータ信号である。一般にSPI通信におけるMISOの出力レベルが変化するタイミングは、MOSIと同様にSCLKの出力レベルが変化するタイミングに同期している。このため、MOSI接点TC08、TA08の隣にMISO接点TC09、TA09を配置することで、MOSIとMISOの相互間でのクロストークを抑制することができる。 The MISO connected to the contacts TC09 and TA09 next to the MOSI contacts TC08 and TA08 is a data signal transmitted from the accessory control circuit 201 to the camera control circuit 101 in SPI communication. Generally, the timing at which the output level of MISO changes in SPI communication is synchronized with the timing at which the output level of SCLK changes, similar to MOSI. Therefore, by arranging the MISO contacts TC09 and TA09 next to the MOSI contacts TC08 and TA08, crosstalk between the MOSI and the MISO can be suppressed.
 MISO接点TC09、TA09のもう一方の隣の接点TC10、TA10に接続されたCSは、SPI通信においてカメラ制御回路101からアクセサリ制御回路201へ送信される通信要求信号である。一般にSPI通信におけるCSは、通信要求を行ってから通信が完了するまでは一定の出力レベルを保持する。このため、MISO接点TC09、TA09の隣にCS接点TC10、TA10を配置することで、MISOに対するクロストークを抑制することができる。 The CS connected to the contacts TC10 and TA10 next to the MISO contacts TC09 and TA09 is a communication request signal transmitted from the camera control circuit 101 to the accessory control circuit 201 in SPI communication. Generally, CS in SPI communication maintains a constant output level from the time when a communication request is made to the time when communication is completed. Therefore, by arranging the CS contacts TC10 and TA10 next to the MISO contacts TC09 and TA09, crosstalk to the MISO can be suppressed.
 CS接点TC10、TA10のもう一方の隣の接点TC11、TA11に接続された通信要求信号/WAKEは、アクセサリ制御回路201からカメラ制御回路101に対して通信要求を行う信号である。先に説明したように通信要求信号/WAKEはオープンドレイン方式の信号であるため、比較的クロストークの影響を受けやすい信号である。このため、本実施形態では、相対的に信号レベルの変化の頻度が低いCSの接点TC10、TA10を通信要求信号/WAKEの接点TC11、TA11に隣接させることで、通信要求信号/WAKEに対するクロストークを抑制することができる。 The communication request signal / WAKE connected to the contacts TC11 and TA11 adjacent to the CS contacts TC10 and TA10 is a signal for making a communication request from the accessory control circuit 201 to the camera control circuit 101. As described above, since the communication request signal / WAKE is an open drain type signal, it is a signal that is relatively susceptible to crosstalk. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the CS contacts TC10 and TA10, whose signal level changes relatively infrequently, are placed adjacent to the communication request signal / WAKE contacts TC11 and TA11 to crosstalk the communication request signal / WAKE. Can be suppressed.
 また、カメラ接続部141とアクセサリ接続部211の両端およびその近傍(以下、これらをまとめて両端側という)に位置する接点TC01~TC03,TA01~TA03と接点TC19~TC21,TA19~TA21には、インピーダンスコントロールが必要な差動信号を接続している。アクシューインターフェースへの信号配線はフレキシブル基板を用いた構成が一般的である。フレキシブル基板で所望の配線インピーダンスを実現するためには、差動信号のライン間や並走する配線するGNDとの間隔を一定に保つ必要がある、また、両面使用の基板においては差動信号の裏側にメッシュ状のGND配線を形成することが一般的である。このようにインピーダンスコントロールが必要な信号配線は、シングルエンドの一般的な信号と比べて相対的に配線設計上の制約が大きくなる。 Further, the contacts TC01 to TC03, TA01 to TA03 and the contacts TC19 to TC21, TA19 to TA21 located at both ends of the camera connection portion 141 and the accessory connection portion 211 and their vicinity thereof (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as both end sides) may be used. A differential signal that requires impedance control is connected. The signal wiring to the access interface is generally configured using a flexible substrate. In order to achieve the desired wiring impedance on a flexible board, it is necessary to keep the distance between the lines of the differential signal and the GND to be wired in parallel, and in the board using both sides, the differential signal It is common to form a mesh-like GND wiring on the back side. As described above, the signal wiring that requires impedance control has relatively large restrictions on the wiring design as compared with a general single-ended signal.
 これに対して本実施形態では、インピーダンスコントロールが必要な差動信号を、カメラ接続部141とアクセサリ接続部211の両端側に位置する接点に接続することで、他の信号との関わり相対的に低くして、配線設計の自由度を高めている。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the differential signal that requires impedance control is connected to the contacts located on both ends of the camera connection portion 141 and the accessory connection portion 211, so that the differential signal is relatively related to other signals. It is lowered to increase the degree of freedom in wiring design.
 また、差動信号は、USBやPCIeのような数100Mpbs~数Gbps程度の高速転送が可能であり、大容量のデータを機器間での転送に適している。一方、アクセサリ200の種類によっては差動信号を用いない場合もある。このように差動信号を用いないアクセサリでは、差動信号に割り当てられる接点は不要であるため、接点を削除したほうがアクセサリのコストを下げることができる。 Further, the differential signal can be transferred at a high speed of about several hundred Mbps to several Gbps such as USB and PCIe, and is suitable for transferring a large amount of data between devices. On the other hand, depending on the type of accessory 200, the differential signal may not be used. In such an accessory that does not use a differential signal, the contact assigned to the differential signal is unnecessary, so it is possible to reduce the cost of the accessory by deleting the contact.
 図12は、図1に示したアクセサリ200の構成を変更した例を示している。具体的には、接点TA01~TA03,TA19~TA21とそれらに接続される信号および回路を省いた構成を有する。すなわち、図12のアクセサリ200は15個の接点を有する。図12の構成では、カメラ接続部141の両端側に位置する接点TC01~TC03とTC19~TC21に差動信号を割り当てる。一方、差動信号が不要なアクセサリ200ではアクセサリ接続部211における差動信号用の接点をなくして、該アクセサリ200に必要な接点のみを含む接点配置を採用している。 FIG. 12 shows an example in which the configuration of the accessory 200 shown in FIG. 1 is changed. Specifically, it has a configuration in which contacts TA01 to TA03 and TA19 to TA21 and signals and circuits connected to them are omitted. That is, the accessory 200 of FIG. 12 has 15 contacts. In the configuration of FIG. 12, differential signals are assigned to the contacts TC01 to TC03 and TC19 to TC21 located on both ends of the camera connection portion 141. On the other hand, in the accessory 200 that does not require a differential signal, the contact for the differential signal in the accessory connection portion 211 is eliminated, and a contact arrangement including only the contact required for the accessory 200 is adopted.
 また図12のアクセサリ200では、カメラ接続部141とアクセサリ接続部211における両端に近い接点TC04,TA04および接点TC18,TA18をGND接点としている。このような接点配置にすることで、カメラ接続部141の一部の接点と接続されるアクセサリ200においても、アクセサリ接続部211の両端接点をGND接点にすることができる。これにより、アクセサリ200に過度の静圧や衝撃が加わった場合にもGND接点の接触が離れることを防ぐことができる。 Further, in the accessory 200 of FIG. 12, the contacts TC04 and TA04 and the contacts TC18 and TA18 near both ends of the camera connection portion 141 and the accessory connection portion 211 are used as GND contacts. With such a contact arrangement, even in the accessory 200 connected to a part of the contacts of the camera connection portion 141, the contacts at both ends of the accessory connection portion 211 can be made into GND contacts. As a result, it is possible to prevent the GND contacts from being separated from each other even when an excessive static pressure or impact is applied to the accessory 200.
 ここまでは、アクセサリ200をカメラ100に直接装着する場合について説明したが、次に図13を用いて、カメラ100とアクセサリ200との間に中間アクセサリ300を装着する場合ついて説明する。カメラ100とアクセサリ200の構成には前述した通りである。中間アクセサリ300としては、カメラ100とアクセサリ200の距離を延ばすための延長ケーブルや、カメラ100に対して複数のアクセサリを同時装着するためのアダプタ等がある。本実施形態では、中間アクセサリ300が延長ケーブルである場合について説明する。図13の構成では、中間アクセサリ300がアクセサリに相当し、アクセサリ200が他のアクセサリに相当する。 Up to this point, the case where the accessory 200 is directly attached to the camera 100 has been described. Next, the case where the intermediate accessory 300 is attached between the camera 100 and the accessory 200 will be described with reference to FIG. The configuration of the camera 100 and the accessory 200 is as described above. The intermediate accessory 300 includes an extension cable for extending the distance between the camera 100 and the accessory 200, an adapter for simultaneously attaching a plurality of accessories to the camera 100, and the like. In this embodiment, the case where the intermediate accessory 300 is an extension cable will be described. In the configuration of FIG. 13, the intermediate accessory 300 corresponds to an accessory, and the accessory 200 corresponds to another accessory.
 中間アクセサリ300は、カメラ100とアクセサリ200のそれぞれに装着可能なカメラ用シューとアクセサリ用シューとを有し、それぞれにカメラ側中間接続部311とアクセサリ側中間接続部312が設けられている。カメラ側中間接続部311は、一列に配列された21個の接点TM01~TM21を有し、カメラ100と電気的な接続を行うためのコネクタである。接点TM01~TM21はそれぞれ、カメラ接続部141における接点TC01~TC21と一対一に接触する。 The intermediate accessory 300 has a camera shoe and an accessory shoe that can be attached to the camera 100 and the accessory 200, respectively, and each of the intermediate accessory 300 is provided with a camera-side intermediate connection portion 311 and an accessory-side intermediate connection portion 312. The camera-side intermediate connection portion 311 has 21 contacts TM01 to TM21 arranged in a row, and is a connector for making an electrical connection with the camera 100. The contacts TM01 to TM21 each make one-to-one contact with the contacts TC01 to TC21 at the camera connection portion 141.
 一方、アクセサリ側中間接続部312は、一列に配列された21個の接点TN01~TN21を有し、アクセサリ200と電気的な接続を行うためのコネクタである。接点TN01~TN21はそれぞれ、アクセサリ接続部211における接点TA01~TA21と一対一に接触する。 On the other hand, the accessory-side intermediate connection portion 312 has 21 contacts TN01 to TN21 arranged in a row, and is a connector for making an electrical connection with the accessory 200. The contacts TN01 to TN21 are in one-to-one contact with the contacts TA01 to TA21 in the accessory connection portion 211, respectively.
 このような接点配置を中間アクセサリ300にて行うことで、アクセサリ200をカメラ100に直接装着した場合と同様の電源供給や通信を行うことができる。このとき、中間アクセサリ300はカメラ100から電源供給を受けてもよいし、カメラ100からの電源供給をそのままアクセサリ200に伝達させるようにしてもよい。本実施形態における電源供給は、カメラ100からの電源供給をそのままアクセサリ200に伝達させるような、アクセサリ300には電源供給されていない場合も含む。 By arranging such contacts with the intermediate accessory 300, it is possible to supply power and perform communication in the same manner as when the accessory 200 is directly attached to the camera 100. At this time, the intermediate accessory 300 may receive the power supply from the camera 100, or the power supply from the camera 100 may be transmitted to the accessory 200 as it is. The power supply in the present embodiment includes a case where the power supply from the camera 100 is transmitted to the accessory 200 as it is, and the power supply is not supplied to the accessory 300.
 なお、図13ではカメラ側中間接続部311の接点数をカメラ接続部141の接点数と同じとし、またアクセサリ側中間接続部312の接点数をアクセサリ接続部211の接点数と同じとしているが、必ずしもそれぞれを同数にする必要はない。 In FIG. 13, the number of contacts of the camera-side intermediate connection unit 311 is the same as the number of contacts of the camera connection unit 141, and the number of contacts of the accessory-side intermediate connection unit 312 is the same as the number of contacts of the accessory connection unit 211. It is not always necessary to have the same number of each.
 図14は、アクセサリ200と中間アクセサリ300の構成を図13の構成から変更した例を示す。カメラ接続部141の両端側の接点TC01~TC03,TC19~TC21には差動信号が接続されているが、アクセサリ200の機能によっては差動信号が不要な場合もある。図14の構成では、カメラ側中間接続部311およびアクセサリ側中間接続部312とアクセサリ接続部211から差動信号が接続される接点をなくしている。すなわち、図14の中間アクセサリ300とアクセサリ200はそれぞれ15個の接点を有する。これにより、中間アクセサリ300とアクセサリ200に必要な接点のみを含む接点配置を採用している。 FIG. 14 shows an example in which the configurations of the accessory 200 and the intermediate accessory 300 are changed from the configuration of FIG. Although differential signals are connected to the contacts TC01 to TC03 and TC19 to TC21 on both ends of the camera connection portion 141, the differential signal may not be required depending on the function of the accessory 200. In the configuration of FIG. 14, the contact points to which the differential signal is connected from the camera side intermediate connection portion 311 and the accessory side intermediate connection portion 312 and the accessory connection portion 211 are eliminated. That is, the intermediate accessory 300 and the accessory 200 in FIG. 14 each have 15 contacts. As a result, a contact arrangement including only the contacts required for the intermediate accessory 300 and the accessory 200 is adopted.
 続いて、カメラ100とアクセサリ200の一例である外部フラッシュユニット120との接続構造を詳細に説明する。 Subsequently, the connection structure between the camera 100 and the external flash unit 120, which is an example of the accessory 200, will be described in detail.
 図16(a)は、斜め背面側から見たカメラ100を示す。図16(b)は、カメラ100のアクセサリシュー1123への外部フラッシュユニット120の装着方法を示している。図16(c)は、カメラ100に外部フラッシュユニット120が装着された状態を斜め背面側から見て示している。 FIG. 16A shows the camera 100 viewed from the diagonally rear side. FIG. 16B shows a method of attaching the external flash unit 120 to the accessory shoe 1123 of the camera 100. FIG. 16C shows a state in which the external flash unit 120 is attached to the camera 100 when viewed from the oblique rear side.
 撮像光学系はカメラ100の正面側(被写界側)に設けられ、画像表示部107はカメラ100の背面側に設けられている。カメラ100の上面部には外装部材としてのトップカバー150が設けられており、トップカバー150に対してアクセサリシュー1123が配設されている。一方、外部フラッシュユニット120において、カメラ接続部206は外部フラッシュユニット120の底部に設けられている。 The imaging optical system is provided on the front side (field side) of the camera 100, and the image display unit 107 is provided on the back side of the camera 100. A top cover 150 as an exterior member is provided on the upper surface of the camera 100, and an accessory shoe 1123 is arranged with respect to the top cover 150. On the other hand, in the external flash unit 120, the camera connection portion 206 is provided at the bottom of the external flash unit 120.
 図16(b)に示すように、カメラ100に対して外部フラッシュユニット120をZ方向前側(第1の方向における装着側)に平行にスライドさせてカメラ接続部206とアクセサリシュー1123とを係合させる。これにより、外部フラッシュユニット120をカメラ100に装着することができる。Z方向前側は、カメラ100の背面側から正面側に向かう方向、つまりは画像表示部107側から撮像光学系122側へ向かう方向である。なお、図16以降の図面に示すX方向(第2の方向)、Y方向(第3の方向)およびZ方向(前後方向)は共通している。X方向は、Z方向が水平方向と平行であるときに水平面内でZ方向と直交する方向であり、カメラ100の幅方向である。Y方向は、Z方向とX方向に直交する方向であり、カメラ100の高さ方向である。 As shown in FIG. 16B, the external flash unit 120 is slid parallel to the front side in the Z direction (mounting side in the first direction) with respect to the camera 100 to engage the camera connection portion 206 and the accessory shoe 1123. Let me. As a result, the external flash unit 120 can be attached to the camera 100. The front side in the Z direction is a direction from the back side to the front side of the camera 100, that is, a direction from the image display unit 107 side toward the imaging optical system 122 side. The X direction (second direction), the Y direction (third direction), and the Z direction (front-back direction) shown in the drawings after FIG. 16 are common. The X direction is a direction orthogonal to the Z direction in the horizontal plane when the Z direction is parallel to the horizontal direction, and is the width direction of the camera 100. The Y direction is a direction orthogonal to the Z direction and the X direction, and is the height direction of the camera 100.
 次に、カメラ100のアクセサリシュー1123について詳細に説明する。図17(a)は、トップカバー150と分解したアクセサリシュー1123を示している。図17(b)は、組み立てられたアクセサリシュー1123を示している。トップカバー150に対するアクセサリシュー1123の組付け方向はY方向である。 Next, the accessory shoe 1123 of the camera 100 will be described in detail. FIG. 17A shows the top cover 150 and the disassembled accessory shoe 1123. FIG. 17B shows the assembled accessory shoe 1123. The assembly direction of the accessory shoe 1123 with respect to the top cover 150 is the Y direction.
 アクセサリシュー1123は、係合部材151、接続端子コネクタ152、シューステージ153およびアクセサリシュースプリング154を有する。係合部材151は、外部フラッシュユニット120との係合により該外部フラッシュユニット120を保持するための部材である。接続端子コネクタ152は、樹脂材料等で形成された保持部材としてのコネクタベース部材152e上にX方向に等ピッチで並べられて該コネクタベース部材152eにより保持された複数の接続端子152aを備えている。なお、接続端子152aは、図1に示すカメラ接続部141の接点TC01~TC21に該当する。 The accessory shoe 1123 has an engaging member 151, a connection terminal connector 152, a shoe stage 153, and an accessory shoe spring 154. The engaging member 151 is a member for holding the external flash unit 120 by engaging with the external flash unit 120. The connection terminal connector 152 includes a plurality of connection terminals 152a arranged on the connector base member 152e as a holding member made of a resin material or the like at equal pitches in the X direction and held by the connector base member 152e. .. The connection terminal 152a corresponds to the contacts TC01 to TC21 of the camera connection portion 141 shown in FIG.
 接続端子コネクタ152において、接続端子152aは、図17(b)に示すように外部フラッシュユニット120の装着方向であるZ方向前方(カメラ100の正面側)に配置されている。接続端子コネクタ152のZ方向後方(デジタルカメラ100の背面側)には、図19(a)に示す外部フラッシュユニット120のロックピン252と係合する係合孔部156が設けられている。 In the connection terminal connector 152, the connection terminal 152a is arranged in the Z direction (front side of the camera 100), which is the mounting direction of the external flash unit 120, as shown in FIG. 17 (b). An engagement hole 156 that engages with the lock pin 252 of the external flash unit 120 shown in FIG. 19A is provided behind the connection terminal connector 152 in the Z direction (on the back side of the digital camera 100).
 アクセサリシュー1123に外部フラッシュユニット120が装着された状態において、接続端子152aは、外部フラッシュユニット120と電気的に接続される。また、複数の接続端子152aはそれぞれ、トップカバー150のY方向下側に配置されたフレキシブル基板158と電気的に接続されている。フレキシブル基板158は、カメラ100の不図示のメイン基板に接続されている。このため、アクセサリシュー1123に外部フラッシュユニット120が装着されると、外部フラッシュユニット120とカメラ100との間での通信が可能となる。 With the external flash unit 120 attached to the accessory shoe 1123, the connection terminal 152a is electrically connected to the external flash unit 120. Further, each of the plurality of connection terminals 152a is electrically connected to the flexible substrate 158 arranged on the lower side of the top cover 150 in the Y direction. The flexible substrate 158 is connected to a main substrate (not shown) of the camera 100. Therefore, when the external flash unit 120 is attached to the accessory shoe 1123, communication between the external flash unit 120 and the camera 100 becomes possible.
 シューステージ153は、係合部材151と接続端子コネクタ152を囲うハウジング部材である。アクセサリシュー保持部材155は、係合部材151を保持する構造躯体である。図17(a)に示すように、アクセサリシュー保持部材155、フレキシブル基板158、トップカバー150、シューステージ153および接続端子コネクタ152は、これらを挿通する4本のビス157によって係合部材151に締結される。これにより、これらの部材が互いに位置決めされて固定される。4本のビス157を、X方向とZ方向で等分割した4つの領域に1本ずつ配置することにより、バランスよく上記部材を結合させることができる。 The shoe stage 153 is a housing member that surrounds the engaging member 151 and the connection terminal connector 152. The accessory shoe holding member 155 is a structural skeleton that holds the engaging member 151. As shown in FIG. 17A, the accessory shoe holding member 155, the flexible substrate 158, the top cover 150, the shoe stage 153, and the connection terminal connector 152 are fastened to the engaging member 151 by four screws 157 for inserting them. Will be done. As a result, these members are positioned and fixed to each other. By arranging four screws 157 one by one in four regions equally divided in the X direction and the Z direction, the members can be connected in a well-balanced manner.
 図18(a)は係合部材151の上面側の構造を示し、図18(b)は係合部材151の下面側の構造を示す。図18(c)は接続端子コネクタ152の上面側の構造を示す。図24は外部フラッシュユニット120の挿入方向から見たアクセサリシュー1123を示している。 FIG. 18A shows the structure on the upper surface side of the engaging member 151, and FIG. 18B shows the structure on the lower surface side of the engaging member 151. FIG. 18C shows the structure of the connection terminal connector 152 on the upper surface side. FIG. 24 shows the accessory shoe 1123 as viewed from the insertion direction of the external flash unit 120.
 係合部材151は、金属板をループ状に折り曲げて、折り曲げられた両端部の端面同士が継ぎ目151aにおいて互いに対向して当接するように形成されている。係合部材151は、一対の係合部151bと、該一対の係合部151bを相互に連結する連結部151cとを有する。係合部材151には、ビス157の締結に用いられる一対の第1のビス孔部151dと、一対の第2のビス孔部151eとが形成されている。また係合部材151には、外部フラッシュユニット120のロックピン252と係合する係合孔部156が形成されている。 The engaging member 151 is formed by bending a metal plate in a loop shape so that the end faces of the bent end faces face each other at the seam 151a and come into contact with each other. The engaging member 151 has a pair of engaging portions 151b and a connecting portion 151c that connects the pair of engaging portions 151b to each other. The engaging member 151 is formed with a pair of first screw hole portions 151d used for fastening the screw 157 and a pair of second screw hole portions 151e. Further, the engaging member 151 is formed with an engaging hole portion 156 that engages with the lock pin 252 of the external flash unit 120.
 図18(a)および図12に示すように、一対の係合部151bは、X方向において第1の幅(以下、係合部間隔という)151aaだけ離間している。係合部間隔151aa内に、図19(b)に示す後述の外部フラッシュユニット120の保持部材254が挿入される。一対の第1のビス孔部151dは、X方向に所定の間隔をあけて設けられており、Z方向後方(背面側)において、X方向に互いに離間して設けられた一対の第1の締結孔部として機能する。一対の第2のビス孔部151eは、X方向に所定の間隔をあけて設けられており、Z方向前方において、X方向に互いに離間して設けられた一対の第2の締結孔部として機能する。係合孔部156は、一対の第1のビス孔部151dに挟まれた領域において、外部フラッシュユニット120が有するロックピン252と係合可能な位置に形成されている。 As shown in FIGS. 18A and 12, the pair of engaging portions 151b are separated by a first width (hereinafter, referred to as engagement portion spacing) 151aa in the X direction. The holding member 254 of the external flash unit 120, which will be described later, shown in FIG. 19B is inserted into the engaging portion interval 151aa. The pair of first screw hole portions 151d are provided at predetermined intervals in the X direction, and the pair of first fastenings provided apart from each other in the X direction at the rear (rear side) in the Z direction. Functions as a hole. The pair of second screw hole portions 151e are provided at predetermined intervals in the X direction, and function as a pair of second fastening hole portions provided apart from each other in the X direction in the front in the Z direction. do. The engagement hole portion 156 is formed at a position capable of engaging with the lock pin 252 of the external flash unit 120 in the region sandwiched between the pair of first screw hole portions 151d.
 接続端子コネクタ152では、図17(b)と図18(c)に示すように、複数の接続端子152aが露出している。複数の接続端子152aが並ぶピッチ方向(X方向)では、係合部材151の係合部間隔151aaによってカメラ接続部206の位置が決められる。このため、外部フラッシュユニット120の保持部材254は、係合部材151によって接続端子コネクタ152に対して位置決めされる。 In the connection terminal connector 152, as shown in FIGS. 17B and 18C, a plurality of connection terminals 152a are exposed. In the pitch direction (X direction) in which the plurality of connection terminals 152a are lined up, the position of the camera connecting portion 206 is determined by the engaging portion spacing 151aa of the engaging member 151. Therefore, the holding member 254 of the external flash unit 120 is positioned with respect to the connection terminal connector 152 by the engaging member 151.
 さらに、図1に示したカメラ接続部141の一例である接続端子コネクタ152(コネクタベース部材152e)のZ方向前側におけるX方向にて複数の接続端子152aを挟んだ両側には、図24に示す当接面と溝部が形成されている。すなわち、外部フラッシュユニット120の装着時にZ方向にてアクセサリシュー1123と当接してこれを位置決めする当接面152bと、アクセサリシュー1123が挿入される溝部152cとが形成されている。各溝部152cは、当接面152bからZ方向前側(装着側)に延びるように形成されており、内側および斜め上側を向くように(X方向に対して傾きを有するように)形成された斜面部152dが設けられている。なお、溝部152cにおける斜面部152dより上側の部分は、斜面部152dの上端の位置からX方向外側に延びている。これは、溝部152cの上端まで斜面部152dを形成すると樹脂成型時に斜面部152dに窪み(ひけ)が発生するので、これを防止するためである。 Further, FIG. 24 shows on both sides of the connection terminal connector 152 (connector base member 152e), which is an example of the camera connection portion 141 shown in FIG. 1, with a plurality of connection terminals 152a sandwiched in the X direction on the front side in the Z direction. A contact surface and a groove are formed. That is, an abutting surface 152b that abuts and positions the accessory shoe 1123 in the Z direction when the external flash unit 120 is mounted, and a groove portion 152c into which the accessory shoe 1123 is inserted are formed. Each groove portion 152c is formed so as to extend from the contact surface 152b to the front side (mounting side) in the Z direction, and is a slope formed so as to face inward and diagonally upward (inclination with respect to the X direction). A portion 152d is provided. The portion of the groove portion 152c above the slope portion 152d extends outward in the X direction from the position of the upper end of the slope portion 152d. This is to prevent a dent (sink) from being generated in the slope portion 152d during resin molding when the slope portion 152d is formed up to the upper end of the groove portion 152c.
 図24に示すように、X方向においてアクセサリシュー1123のコネクタベース部材152eにおける溝部152cの最も外側の内面152cccは、係合部材151の一対の係合部151bの内端面(係合部間隔151aa)よりも外側、かつ係合部材151の最も外側の内面151bbより内側に設けられている。 As shown in FIG. 24, in the X direction, the outermost inner surface 152cc of the groove portion 152c in the connector base member 152e of the accessory shoe 1123 is the inner end surface of the pair of engaging portions 151b of the engaging member 151 (engaging portion spacing 151aa). It is provided on the outer side and inside the outermost inner surface 151bb of the engaging member 151.
 溝部152cの底面側における斜面部152dの端(下端)である斜面開始位置152ccは、係合部間隔151aaの内側に設けられている。これにより、カメラ接続部206の後述する当接部251bに当接してZ方向での位置決めを行う当接面152bを設ける領域を確保することができる。さらに斜面開始位置152ccから始まる斜面形状を設けることで、外部フラッシュユニット120のシュー装置(後述するカメラ接続部206)が挿入される空間を広げることができ、シュー装置の形状の自由度も確保することが可能となる。この結果、外部フラッシュユニット120のシュー装置にその接続端子を保護する形状を十分に形成することができる。 The slope start position 152cc, which is the end (lower end) of the slope portion 152d on the bottom surface side of the groove portion 152c, is provided inside the engagement portion spacing 151aa. As a result, it is possible to secure an area for providing the contact surface 152b that comes into contact with the contact portion 251b described later of the camera connection portion 206 and positions the camera in the Z direction. Further, by providing the slope shape starting from the slope start position 152 cc, the space into which the shoe device (camera connection portion 206 described later) of the external flash unit 120 is inserted can be expanded, and the degree of freedom in the shape of the shoe device can be secured. It becomes possible. As a result, the shoe device of the external flash unit 120 can be sufficiently formed with a shape that protects the connection terminals.
 次に、外部フラッシュユニット120について説明する。図19(a)は、カメラ接続部206側(Y方向下側)から見た外部フラッシュユニット120を示している。図19(b)は、図19(a)中のA-A線での切断面を示し、カメラ接続部206の内部構造を示す。図20(a)は、カメラ接続部206を示している。ただし、後述する基台部250とロックレバー253の図示は省略されている。図20(b)は、Z方向前方から見たカメラ接続部206を示している。 Next, the external flash unit 120 will be described. FIG. 19A shows the external flash unit 120 as viewed from the camera connection portion 206 side (lower side in the Y direction). FIG. 19B shows the cut surface along the line AA in FIG. 19A and shows the internal structure of the camera connection portion 206. FIG. 20A shows the camera connection portion 206. However, the illustration of the base portion 250 and the lock lever 253, which will be described later, is omitted. FIG. 20B shows the camera connection portion 206 viewed from the front in the Z direction.
 カメラ接続部206は、カメラ100のアクセサリシュー1123に装着された状態において、図19(b)に示すように外部フラッシュユニット120の基台部250のY方向下側(図19(a)では上側)に設けられている。カメラ接続部206は、シュー取付脚(係合部材、シュープレート)251、ロックピン252、ロックレバー253、保持部材254、接続プラグ256およびY方向保持部材258を有する。 When the camera connecting portion 206 is attached to the accessory shoe 1123 of the camera 100, as shown in FIG. 19B, the camera connecting portion 206 is on the lower side in the Y direction of the base portion 250 of the external flash unit 120 (upper side in FIG. 19A). ). The camera connecting portion 206 has a shoe mounting leg (engaging member, shoe plate) 251, a lock pin 252, a lock lever 253, a holding member 254, a connecting plug 256, and a Y-direction holding member 258.
 シュー取付脚251は、外部フラッシュユニット120をカメラ100のアクセサリシュー1123に係合して保持される係合部材である。すなわち、シュー取付脚251は、アクセサリシュー1123の係合部材151に対して着脱可能な外部フラッシュユニット120側の係合部材である。 The shoe mounting leg 251 is an engaging member that engages and holds the external flash unit 120 with the accessory shoe 1123 of the camera 100. That is, the shoe mounting leg 251 is an engaging member on the external flash unit 120 side that can be attached to and detached from the engaging member 151 of the accessory shoe 1123.
 アクセサリシュー1123とカメラ接続部206には、装着状態を維持するための圧力や外部フラッシュユニット120に作用する外力(衝撃等)に起因する大きな応力が加わる。シュー取付脚251は、このような大きな応力に対する高い機械的強度を確保するために、金属板(板金)を加工することにより製作されている。 A large stress is applied to the accessory shoe 1123 and the camera connection portion 206 due to the pressure for maintaining the mounted state and the external force (impact, etc.) acting on the external flash unit 120. The shoe mounting leg 251 is manufactured by processing a metal plate (sheet metal) in order to secure high mechanical strength against such a large stress.
 ロックピン252は、カメラ接続部206(シュー取付脚251)がアクセサリシュー1123に装着された状態で外部フラッシュユニット120の脱落を防止するための部材であり、Y方向に移動可能にシュー取付脚251に保持されている。具体的には、ロックピン252は、Y方向保持部材258によりY方向に摺動可能に保持されている。ロックレバー253とY方向保持部材258は、保持部材254により保持されている。 The lock pin 252 is a member for preventing the external flash unit 120 from falling off when the camera connecting portion 206 (shoe mounting leg 251) is mounted on the accessory shoe 1123, and the shoe mounting leg 251 is movable in the Y direction. It is held in. Specifically, the lock pin 252 is slidably held in the Y direction by the Y direction holding member 258. The lock lever 253 and the Y-direction holding member 258 are held by the holding member 254.
 外部フラッシュユニット120がアクセサリシュー1123に装着され、ロックレバー253が回転操作されると、不図示のカム部によってY方向保持部材258が図19(b)におけるY方向下側に移動する。その際、Y方向保持部材258と共にロックピン252も図19(b)におけるY方向下側に移動する。これにより、ロックピン252は、シュー取付脚251から突出し、アクセサリシュー1123の係合部材151に設けられた係合孔部156に係合する。ロックピン252と係合孔部156は、外部フラッシュユニット120とカメラ100との電気的接続を保証するためのZ方向での位置決め部材として機能する。 When the external flash unit 120 is attached to the accessory shoe 1123 and the lock lever 253 is rotated, the Y-direction holding member 258 is moved downward in the Y-direction in FIG. 19B by a cam portion (not shown). At that time, the lock pin 252 also moves downward in the Y direction in FIG. 19B together with the holding member 258 in the Y direction. As a result, the lock pin 252 protrudes from the shoe mounting leg 251 and engages with the engaging hole portion 156 provided in the engaging member 151 of the accessory shoe 1123. The lock pin 252 and the engagement hole 156 function as a positioning member in the Z direction for ensuring an electrical connection between the external flash unit 120 and the camera 100.
 図1に示したアクセサリ接続部211の一例である接続プラグ256は、カメラ接続部206におけるZ方向前側に設けられており、樹脂材料等の非導電性材料(誘電材料)により形成され、保持部材254と一体化されている。接続プラグ256のX方向での最外幅Tは、シュー取付脚251のX方向の幅Wよりも狭い。これにより、シュー取付脚251に当接部251bを設ける領域を確保している。接続プラグ256は、図18(c)に示すアクセサリシュー1123の複数の接続端子152aに当接して通信を行うための複数の接続端子257を有する。なお、接続端子257は、図1に示したアクセサリ接続部211の接点TA01~TA21に該当する。 The connection plug 256, which is an example of the accessory connection portion 211 shown in FIG. 1, is provided on the front side in the Z direction of the camera connection portion 206, is formed of a non-conductive material (dielectric material) such as a resin material, and is a holding member. It is integrated with 254. The outermost width T of the connection plug 256 in the X direction is narrower than the width W of the shoe mounting leg 251 in the X direction. As a result, an area for providing the contact portion 251b on the shoe mounting leg 251 is secured. The connection plug 256 has a plurality of connection terminals 257 for contacting and communicating with the plurality of connection terminals 152a of the accessory shoe 1123 shown in FIG. 18 (c). The connection terminal 257 corresponds to the contacts TA01 to TA21 of the accessory connection portion 211 shown in FIG.
 複数の接続端子257は、複数の接続端子152aと一対一に対応するように設けられ、それぞれZ方向に延びるように、かつX方向に並ぶように保持部材254により保持されている。各接続端子257は、対応する接続端子152aと接触する先端部257aを有する。また各接続端子257は、先端部257aからZ方向後方に延びる形状を有し、先端部257aが接続端子152aに当接した際に弾性変形によって先端部257aを図19(b)におけるY方向上側に変位させる伸延部257bを有する。伸延部257bのZ方向後端には、Y方向上側に延びる延直部257cが形成されている。延直部257cの上端には、外部フラッシュユニット120の不図示のメイン基板に接続されてY方向上側から保持部材254内に挿入されたフレキシブル基板259に接続されるフレキシブル基板接続部257dが設けられている。 The plurality of connection terminals 257 are provided so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of connection terminals 152a, and are held by the holding member 254 so as to extend in the Z direction and to line up in the X direction. Each connection terminal 257 has a tip portion 257a that comes into contact with the corresponding connection terminal 152a. Further, each connection terminal 257 has a shape extending rearward in the Z direction from the tip portion 257a, and when the tip portion 257a abuts on the connection terminal 152a, the tip portion 257a is elastically deformed to the upper side in the Y direction in FIG. 19 (b). It has an extension portion 257b that is displaced to. At the rear end of the extension portion 257b in the Z direction, an extension portion 257c extending upward in the Y direction is formed. At the upper end of the straightening portion 257c, a flexible substrate connecting portion 257d which is connected to the main substrate (not shown) of the external flash unit 120 and connected to the flexible substrate 259 inserted into the holding member 254 from the upper side in the Y direction is provided. ing.
 なお、伸延部257bにはZ方向の途中にはY方向に段差を有する段差部257eが形成されている。前述したように伸延部257bはY方向に弾性変形が可能である。しかし、伸延部257bのZ方向の距離Lが短い場合には十分な変形量を得ることができないことで耐久性が低下し、その結果、接続端子152aと先端部257aとの着脱が繰り返されると伸延部257bが破損しやすくなるおそれがある。そこで、伸延部257bに段差部257eを設けることで、伸延部257bをシュー取付脚251に干渉させることなく、十分な距離Lを確保している。 The extension portion 257b is formed with a step portion 257e having a step in the Y direction in the middle of the Z direction. As described above, the stretched portion 257b can be elastically deformed in the Y direction. However, when the distance L in the Z direction of the extension portion 257b is short, the durability is lowered because a sufficient amount of deformation cannot be obtained, and as a result, the connection terminal 152a and the tip portion 257a are repeatedly attached and detached. The stretched portion 257b may be easily damaged. Therefore, by providing the stepped portion 257e on the extending portion 257b, a sufficient distance L is secured without causing the extending portion 257b to interfere with the shoe mounting leg 251.
 図20(a),(b)に示すように、接続プラグ256のX方向両端には、複数の接続端子257を間に挟むようにY方向下側(第3の方向)に突出する一対の突起部256aが設けられている。図20(b)に示すように、各突起部256aの下先端部256dは、接続端子257を圧力や衝撃等の外力から保護するために、接続端子257の先端部257aの下端を結んだラインよりも下側まで突出している。つまり、接続端子257の先端部257aは、一対の突起部256aの下先端部256dを結んだラインよりも上側(内側)に設けられている。 As shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B, a pair of connection plugs 256 projecting downward (third direction) in the Y direction so as to sandwich a plurality of connection terminals 257 at both ends in the X direction. A protrusion 256a is provided. As shown in FIG. 20B, the lower tip portion 256d of each protrusion 256a is a line connecting the lower ends of the tip portion 257a of the connection terminal 257 in order to protect the connection terminal 257 from external forces such as pressure and impact. It protrudes below. That is, the tip portion 257a of the connection terminal 257 is provided above (inside) the line connecting the lower tip portions 256d of the pair of protrusions 256a.
 さらに各突起部256aのX方向外側(外面)には、下先端部256dから斜め上側に延びて斜め下側を向いた、すなわちX方向に対して傾きを有する外側面としての斜面部256bが設けられている。各突起部256aがこのような形状を有することで、接続プラグ256を接続端子コネクタ152において斜面部152dを有する溝部152c内に挿入することが可能である。 Further, on the outer side (outer surface) of each protrusion 256a in the X direction, a slope portion 256b is provided as an outer surface that extends diagonally upward from the lower tip portion 256d and faces diagonally downward, that is, has an inclination with respect to the X direction. Has been done. Since each protrusion 256a has such a shape, the connection plug 256 can be inserted into the groove portion 152c having the slope portion 152d in the connection terminal connector 152.
 斜面部256bは、接続プラグ256に対する圧力や衝撃等の外力を逃がして接続プラグが破損しないようにする役割を有する。例えば、図20(c)は、接続プラグ256に対してX方向から外力が加わった場合を示す。図20(c)は、Z方向前方から見た接続プラグ256を示している。 The slope portion 256b has a role of releasing external forces such as pressure and impact on the connection plug 256 to prevent the connection plug from being damaged. For example, FIG. 20C shows a case where an external force is applied to the connection plug 256 from the X direction. FIG. 20 (c) shows the connection plug 256 seen from the front in the Z direction.
 X方向からの外力をFとし、ベクトルとして定義する。ベクトル空間における加法の規則に従って斜面部256bに作用した外力Fを分解すると、斜面部256bに沿う方向の分力Fと、斜面部256bに垂直な方向の分力Fとに分解される。外力Fと斜面部256bとがなす角度をθとすると、下記の式(1)により分力Fと分力Fを求めることができる。
=Fcosθ
=Fsinθ      (1)
斜面部256bを設ける場合は、θは0°<θ<90°となる。この範囲において、
<F
<F        (2)
となる。分力Fは斜面部256bに沿う方向に逃げるため、接続プラグ256に対して影響を及ぼす力は分力Fのみとなる。前述したように、分力Fは分力Fより小さいため、ある程度大きな外力が加わっても接続プラグ256が破損しないようにすることができる。
Let F 1 be the external force from the X direction and define it as a vector. When the external force F 1 acting on the slope portion 256b is decomposed according to the rules of addition in the vector space, it is decomposed into a component force F 2 in the direction along the slope portion 256b and a component force F 3 in the direction perpendicular to the slope portion 256b. .. Assuming that the angle formed by the external force F 1 and the slope portion 256b is θ, the component force F 2 and the component force F 3 can be obtained by the following equation (1).
F 2 = F 1 cos θ
F 3 = F 1 sin θ (1)
When the slope portion 256b is provided, θ is 0 ° <θ <90 °. In this range
F 2 <F 1
F 3 <F 1 (2)
Will be. Since the component force F 2 escapes in the direction along the slope portion 256b, the force that affects the connection plug 256 is only the component force F 3. As described above, since the component force F 3 is smaller than the component force F 1 , it is possible to prevent the connection plug 256 from being damaged even if a large external force is applied to some extent.
 X方向両側の斜面部256bをY方向下側ほどX方向の幅が狭くなるように形成することで、X方向からの外力だけでなく、Y方向下側からの外力に対しても同様に該外力の一部を逃がすことが可能である。 By forming the slope portions 256b on both sides in the X direction so that the width in the X direction becomes narrower toward the lower side in the Y direction, not only the external force from the X direction but also the external force from the lower side in the Y direction can be similarly applied. It is possible to release a part of the external force.
 図25は、Z方向から見た接続プラグ256の一部を拡大して示している。Y方向において、突起部256aの下先端部256dから接続プラグ256の上面までの高さ(突起部を含む接続プラグの高さ)をBとし、下先端部256d(斜面開始位置256c)から斜面部256bの上端までの斜面部256bの高さをAとする。このとき、AはBの1/5以上であることが好ましく、さらには1/4以上、1/3以上または図13に示すように半分以上であることがより好ましい。すなわち、斜面部256bはX方向からの外力を逃がす機能のために有意な寸法を有するように形成されており、一般的に突起部の角に設けられる面取り形状とは異なる。また、X方向に対する斜面部256bの傾き角度θは、上述した外力を逃がす機能のためには、45°±20°の範囲に設定することが好ましい。 FIG. 25 shows an enlarged part of the connection plug 256 seen from the Z direction. In the Y direction, the height from the lower tip portion 256d of the protrusion 256a to the upper surface of the connection plug 256 (the height of the connection plug including the protrusion) is B, and from the lower tip portion 256d (slope start position 256c) to the slope portion. Let A be the height of the slope portion 256b to the upper end of 256b. At this time, A is preferably 1/5 or more of B, and more preferably 1/4 or more, 1/3 or more, or half or more as shown in FIG. That is, the slope portion 256b is formed to have a significant dimension for the function of releasing an external force from the X direction, and is generally different from the chamfered shape provided at the corner of the protrusion. Further, the inclination angle θ of the slope portion 256b with respect to the X direction is preferably set in the range of 45 ° ± 20 ° for the above-mentioned function of releasing the external force.
 Z方向の位置決め部であるアクセサリシュー1123の当接面152bに対するシュー取付脚251において当接部251bの領域を十分に確保するために、両側の斜面部256bのうち下先端部256dにおける斜面開始位置256c間のX方向での幅をできるだけ短く設けることが望ましい。本実施形態では、斜面開始位置256c間のX方向での幅を、保持部材254のX方向での幅Vより内側に設けることで、当接部251bの領域を十分に確保している。 In order to secure a sufficient area of the contact portion 251b on the shoe mounting leg 251 with respect to the contact surface 152b of the accessory shoe 1123 which is the positioning portion in the Z direction, the slope start position at the lower tip portion 256d of the slope portions 256b on both sides. It is desirable to make the width between 256c in the X direction as short as possible. In the present embodiment, the width of the slope start position 256c in the X direction is provided inside the width V of the holding member 254 in the X direction, so that the region of the contact portion 251b is sufficiently secured.
 カメラ接続部206は、シュー取付脚251と保持部材254とが締結された構造を有する。この締結構造の詳細については後述する。 The camera connecting portion 206 has a structure in which the shoe mounting leg 251 and the holding member 254 are fastened. The details of this fastening structure will be described later.
 保持部材254は、図18(a)に示したアクセサリシュー1123の係合部材151の係合部間隔151aaに挿入可能であってX方向においてシュー取付脚251の幅Wよりも短い幅Vの連結部254aを有する。幅Wと幅Vは、日本工業規格(JIS)のB7101-1975「カメラの付属品取付座及び取付足」で寸法が規定されている。連結部254aが係合部材151と嵌合することによって、外部フラッシュユニット120のカメラ100に対するX方向での位置が決まる。また、シュー取付脚251は、図17(a),(b)に示した付勢部材としてのアクセサリシュースプリング154の弾性変形部154aに当接することによってY方向上側に付勢される。これにより、シュー嵌合部251aの上面が係合部材151の下面と当接(圧接)し、外部フラッシュユニット120のカメラ100に対するY方向での位置が決まる。 The holding member 254 can be inserted into the engaging portion spacing 151aa of the engaging member 151 of the accessory shoe 1123 shown in FIG. 18A, and has a width V shorter than the width W of the shoe mounting leg 251 in the X direction. It has a part 254a. The width W and width V are defined by Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) B7101-1975 "Camera accessory mounting seat and mounting foot". By fitting the connecting portion 254a with the engaging member 151, the position of the external flash unit 120 with respect to the camera 100 is determined in the X direction. Further, the shoe mounting leg 251 is urged upward in the Y direction by abutting on the elastically deformed portion 154a of the accessory shoe spring 154 as the urging member shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B. As a result, the upper surface of the shoe fitting portion 251a comes into contact (pressure contact) with the lower surface of the engaging member 151, and the position of the external flash unit 120 with respect to the camera 100 is determined in the Y direction.
 さらに、接続端子コネクタ152のZ方向前側の当接面152bに対してシュー取付脚251の当接部251bが当接することによって、外部フラッシュユニット120のカメラ100に対するZ方向での位置が決まる。 Further, the contact portion 251b of the shoe mounting leg 251 comes into contact with the contact surface 152b on the front side in the Z direction of the connection terminal connector 152, so that the position of the external flash unit 120 with respect to the camera 100 is determined in the Z direction.
 なお、保持部材254は、シュー取付脚251と基台部250とを連結するための構造体でもあり、ロックピン252と接続端子257は連結部254aの内部に配置されている。 The holding member 254 is also a structure for connecting the shoe mounting leg 251 and the base portion 250, and the lock pin 252 and the connecting terminal 257 are arranged inside the connecting portion 254a.
 次に、保持部材254とシュー取付脚251との締結構造について説明する。図21(a)はY方向上側から見たカメラ接続部206を示し、図21(b)は図21(a)中のB‐B線での切断面を示す。 Next, the fastening structure between the holding member 254 and the shoe mounting leg 251 will be described. 21 (a) shows the camera connection portion 206 seen from the upper side in the Y direction, and FIG. 21 (b) shows the cut surface along the line BB in FIG. 21 (a).
 保持部材254にシュー取付脚251を締結するための締結部材である一対の第1のビス260aと一対の第2のビス260bは、保持部材254を貫通してシュー取付脚251に締結される。このとき、X方向とZ方向にほぼ等分割された4つの領域にビスを1本ずつバランス良く配置することで、シュー取付脚251が安定的に保持部材254に保持される構造となる。また、前述したように、シュー取付脚251は大きな応力が作用する部品である。このため、バランス良く配置された一対の第1のビス260aと一対の第2のビス260bで金属製のシュー取付脚251を保持部材254に締結することにより、必要な機械的強度を確保するが可能となる。 A pair of first screw 260a and a pair of second screws 260b, which are fastening members for fastening the shoe mounting leg 251 to the holding member 254, penetrate the holding member 254 and are fastened to the shoe mounting leg 251. At this time, by arranging one screw in each of the four regions that are substantially equally divided in the X direction and the Z direction in a well-balanced manner, the shoe mounting leg 251 is stably held by the holding member 254. Further, as described above, the shoe mounting leg 251 is a component on which a large stress acts. Therefore, the required mechanical strength is ensured by fastening the metal shoe mounting legs 251 to the holding member 254 with a pair of first screws 260a and a pair of second screws 260b arranged in a well-balanced manner. It will be possible.
 なお、図21(b)に示すように、一対の第1のビス260aと一対の第2のビス260bとの間に挟まれた領域Sに、複数の接続端子257が配置されている。また、一対の第1のビス260aと一対の第2のビス260bとの間の幅は、接続プラグ256の突起部256aの下先端部256dの間の幅、保持部材254の幅V、接続プラグ256の最外幅T、シュー取付脚251の幅Wよりも狭い。 As shown in FIG. 21B, a plurality of connection terminals 257 are arranged in the region S sandwiched between the pair of first screws 260a and the pair of second screws 260b. The width between the pair of first screws 260a and the pair of second screws 260b is the width between the lower tip portion 256d of the protrusion 256a of the connection plug 256, the width V of the holding member 254, and the connection plug. It is narrower than the outermost width T of 256 and the width W of the shoe mounting leg 251.
 図26は、アクセサリシュー1123にカメラ接続部206が装着された状態をZ方向から見た断面を示している。この図には、前述したカメラ接続部206の寸法T、Vやカメラ接続部206の各部とアクセサリシュー1123の各部との位置関係を示している。 FIG. 26 shows a cross section of the accessory shoe 1123 with the camera connection portion 206 attached, as viewed from the Z direction. This figure shows the dimensions T and V of the camera connecting portion 206 and the positional relationship between each portion of the camera connecting portion 206 and each portion of the accessory shoe 1123.
 図26において、前述したようにカメラ接続部206のシュー嵌合部251aの上面は、Y方向での位置決めのためにアクセサリシュー1123の係合部材151の下面(天井面)に当接している。 In FIG. 26, as described above, the upper surface of the shoe fitting portion 251a of the camera connecting portion 206 is in contact with the lower surface (ceiling surface) of the engaging member 151 of the accessory shoe 1123 for positioning in the Y direction.
 一方、カメラ接続部206における接続プラグ256の突起部256aの下先端部256dおよび斜面部256bはそれぞれ、アクセサリシュー1123の溝部152cの底面および斜面部152dには当接していない。突起部256aの下先端部256dとアクセサリシュー1123の溝部152cの底面との間の隙間は極力小さく設定されている。これにより、外部フラッシュユニット120にX方向の外力が加わった際に突起部256aの下先端部256dがアクセサリシュー1123の溝部152cの底面に当接することができ、接続プラグ256の浮き(アクセサリシュー1123に対する傾き)を小さくすることができる。 On the other hand, the lower tip portion 256d and the slope portion 256b of the protrusion 256a of the connection plug 256 in the camera connecting portion 206 do not abut on the bottom surface and the slope portion 152d of the groove portion 152c of the accessory shoe 1123, respectively. The gap between the lower tip portion 256d of the protrusion 256a and the bottom surface of the groove portion 152c of the accessory shoe 1123 is set to be as small as possible. As a result, when an external force in the X direction is applied to the external flash unit 120, the lower tip portion 256d of the protrusion 256a can come into contact with the bottom surface of the groove portion 152c of the accessory shoe 1123, and the connection plug 256 floats (accessory shoe 1123). The inclination with respect to) can be reduced.
 また、斜面部256b,152d間の隙間と、溝部152cの内端面152cccと接続プラグ256の外端面との間の隙間はそれぞれある程度大きく設定されている。これにより、外部フラッシュユニット120にX方向の外力が加わった際に接続端子257,152aに負荷がかからないようにすることができる。 Further, the gap between the slope portions 256b and 152d and the gap between the inner end surface 152cc of the groove portion 152c and the outer end surface of the connection plug 256 are set to be large to some extent. As a result, when an external force in the X direction is applied to the external flash unit 120, the connection terminals 257 and 152a can be prevented from being loaded.
 なお、アクセサリシュー1123の溝部152cにおいて、溝部152cのY方向での高さ(溝部152cの底面から係合部材151の天井面までの高さ)と斜面部152dのY方向での高さとの関係は、カメラ接続部206における接続プラグ256の高さBと斜面部256bの高さAとの関係と同様である。また、X方向に対する斜面部256bの傾き角度も、カメラ接続部206における斜面部256bの傾き角度θと同様に、45°±20°の範囲に設定することが好ましい。 In the groove portion 152c of the accessory shoe 1123, the relationship between the height of the groove portion 152c in the Y direction (the height from the bottom surface of the groove portion 152c to the ceiling surface of the engaging member 151) and the height of the slope portion 152d in the Y direction. Is the same as the relationship between the height B of the connection plug 256 and the height A of the slope portion 256b in the camera connecting portion 206. Further, it is preferable that the inclination angle of the slope portion 256b with respect to the X direction is also set in the range of 45 ° ± 20 °, similarly to the inclination angle θ of the slope portion 256b in the camera connecting portion 206.
 なお、上記各実施形態では、突起部256aに設けられた斜面部256bの面形状が平面である場合について説明したが、斜面部256bが曲率を有する曲面であってもよい。すなわち、斜面部256bは、X方向に対して傾きを有する面であればよい。 In each of the above embodiments, the case where the surface shape of the slope portion 256b provided on the protrusion 256a is flat has been described, but the slope portion 256b may be a curved surface having a curvature. That is, the slope portion 256b may be a surface having an inclination with respect to the X direction.
 上記実施形態によれば、小型のカメラ接続部206およびアクセサリシュー1123において、従来より多数の接続端子とそれらを保護するための形状を設ける領域や、部品間の位置決めを行うための領域を確保することができる。 According to the above embodiment, in the small camera connection portion 206 and the accessory shoe 1123, an area for providing a large number of connection terminals and a shape for protecting them and an area for positioning between parts are secured. be able to.
 次に、外部フラッシュユニット120の変形例について説明する。図22(a)は、カメラ接続部206側(Y方向下側)から見た外部フラッシュユニット120を示している。図22(b)は、図22(a)中のA-A線での切断面を示し、カメラ接続部206の内部構造を示す。図23(a)は、カメラ接続部206を示している。ただし、基台部250とロックレバー253の図示は省略されている。図23(b)は、Z方向前方から見たカメラ接続部206を示している。 Next, a modified example of the external flash unit 120 will be described. FIG. 22A shows the external flash unit 120 as viewed from the camera connection portion 206 side (lower side in the Y direction). 22 (b) shows the cut surface along the line AA in FIG. 22 (a), and shows the internal structure of the camera connecting portion 206. FIG. 23A shows the camera connection portion 206. However, the illustration of the base portion 250 and the lock lever 253 is omitted. FIG. 23B shows the camera connection portion 206 viewed from the front in the Z direction.
 カメラ接続部206は、カメラ100のアクセサリシュー1123に装着された状態において、図22(b)に示すように外部フラッシュユニット120の基台部250のY方向下側(図22(a)では上側)に設けられている。カメラ接続部206は、シュー取付脚300a、ロックピン252、ロックレバー253、保持部材300、接続プラグ300b、Y方向保持部材258およびシューカバー301を有する。 When the camera connecting portion 206 is attached to the accessory shoe 1123 of the camera 100, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), the camera connecting portion 206 is on the lower side in the Y direction of the base portion 250 of the external flash unit 120 (upper side in FIG. 22 (a)). ). The camera connecting portion 206 has a shoe mounting leg 300a, a lock pin 252, a lock lever 253, a holding member 300, a connecting plug 300b, a Y-direction holding member 258, and a shoe cover 301.
 シュー取付脚300aは、先に説明した実施形態のシュー取付脚251と同様に、外部フラッシュユニット120をカメラ100のアクセサリシュー1123に係合させるための係合部材である。すなわち、シュー取付脚300aは、アクセサリシュー1123の係合部材151に対して着脱可能な外部フラッシュユニット120側の係合部材である。 The shoe mounting leg 300a is an engaging member for engaging the external flash unit 120 with the accessory shoe 1123 of the camera 100, similarly to the shoe mounting leg 251 of the embodiment described above. That is, the shoe mounting leg 300a is an engaging member on the external flash unit 120 side that can be attached to and detached from the engaging member 151 of the accessory shoe 1123.
 先に説明した実施形態では、機械的強度を優先して金属製のシュープレートであるシュー取付脚251と樹脂製の保持部材254とを別部材により形成した。これに対して変形例では、シュー取付脚300aと保持部材300とを樹脂材料(非導電性材料)により一体部材として形成されている。これにより、先の実施形態における一対の第1のビス260aと一対の第2のビス260bが不要になって接続端子257を配置するスペースが広くなるため、より多くの数の接続端子257を配置することができる。この結果、外部フラッシュユニット120は、カメラ接続部206とアクセサリシュー1123を介してより多くの情報をカメラ100と通信することができる。 In the embodiment described above, the shoe mounting leg 251 which is a metal shoe plate and the resin holding member 254 are formed of separate members in order to give priority to mechanical strength. On the other hand, in the modified example, the shoe mounting leg 300a and the holding member 300 are formed as an integral member by a resin material (non-conductive material). As a result, the pair of first screws 260a and the pair of second screws 260b in the previous embodiment are not required, and the space for arranging the connection terminals 257 becomes wider. Therefore, a larger number of connection terminals 257 are arranged. can do. As a result, the external flash unit 120 can communicate more information with the camera 100 via the camera connection portion 206 and the accessory shoe 1123.
 接続プラグ300bは、カメラ接続部206におけるZ方向前側に設けられており、本実施形態では非導電性の樹脂材料により形成された保持部材300と一体の部材として形成されている。先に説明した実施形態と同様に、接続プラグ300bのX方向での最外幅Tをシュー取付脚300aのX方向での幅Wより狭くすることで、シュー取付脚300aにおいて当接部300eを設ける領域を確保している。接続プラグ300bは、図18(c)に示したアクセサリシュー1123の複数の接続端子152aに接触して通信を行うための複数の接続端子257を有する。シューカバー301は、保持部材300に対して取り付けるエンクロージャーであり、複数の接続端子257を保護する部材である。接続端子257の形状は先の実施形態と同じであり、段差部257eを設けてシューカバー301と干渉することなく十分な伸延部257bのZ方向の距離Lを確保している。 The connection plug 300b is provided on the front side in the Z direction of the camera connection portion 206, and is formed as an integral member with the holding member 300 formed of a non-conductive resin material in the present embodiment. Similar to the embodiment described above, the outermost width T of the connection plug 300b in the X direction is made narrower than the width W of the shoe mounting leg 300a in the X direction, so that the contact portion 300e is formed in the shoe mounting leg 300a. The area to be provided is secured. The connection plug 300b has a plurality of connection terminals 257 for contacting and communicating with the plurality of connection terminals 152a of the accessory shoe 1123 shown in FIG. 18 (c). The shoe cover 301 is an enclosure attached to the holding member 300, and is a member that protects a plurality of connection terminals 257. The shape of the connection terminal 257 is the same as that of the previous embodiment, and a step portion 257e is provided to secure a sufficient distance L in the Z direction of the extension portion 257b without interfering with the shoe cover 301.
 接続プラグ300bの形状も、先の実施形態の接続プラグ256と同様であり、接続プラグ300bのX方向両端には、複数の接続端子257を挟み込むようにY方向下側に突出する一対の突起部300cが設けられている。図23(b)に示すように、各突起部300cの下先端部300kは、接続端子257を圧力や衝撃等の外力から保護するために、接続端子257の先端部257aの下端を結んだラインよりも下側まで突出している。つまり、接続端子257の先端部257aは、一対の突起部300bの下先端部300kを結んだラインよりも上側(内側)に設けられている。 The shape of the connection plug 300b is also the same as that of the connection plug 256 of the previous embodiment, and a pair of protrusions protruding downward in the Y direction so as to sandwich a plurality of connection terminals 257 at both ends of the connection plug 300b in the X direction. 300c is provided. As shown in FIG. 23B, the lower tip portion 300k of each protrusion 300c is a line connecting the lower ends of the tip portion 257a of the connection terminal 257 in order to protect the connection terminal 257 from external forces such as pressure and impact. It protrudes below. That is, the tip portion 257a of the connection terminal 257 is provided above (inside) the line connecting the lower tip portions 300k of the pair of protrusions 300b.
 また本実施形態でも、各突起部300cのX方向外側には、下先端部300kから斜め上側に延びて斜め下側を向いた斜面部300fが設けられている。各突起部300cがこのような形状を有することで、接続プラグ300bを、先の実施形態で説明した接続端子コネクタ152において斜面部152dを有する溝部152c内に挿入することが可能である。先の実施形態でも説明したように、斜面部300cは、接続プラグ300bに対する圧力や衝撃等の外力を逃がして接続プラグが破損しないようにする役割を有する。 Further, also in the present embodiment, a slope portion 300f extending diagonally upward from the lower tip portion 300k and facing diagonally downward side is provided on the outer side of each protrusion 300c in the X direction. Since each protrusion 300c has such a shape, the connection plug 300b can be inserted into the groove 152c having the slope portion 152d in the connection terminal connector 152 described in the previous embodiment. As described in the previous embodiment, the slope portion 300c has a role of releasing an external force such as pressure or impact on the connection plug 300b to prevent the connection plug from being damaged.
 さらに先の実施形態と同様に、両側の斜面部300cのうち下先端部300kにおける斜面開始位置300g間のX方向での距離をできるだけ短く設けることが望ましい。このため、両側の斜面開始位置300gをX方向での保持部材254の幅Vより内側に設けて、シュー取付脚300aの当接部300eの領域を十分に確保している。 Further, as in the previous embodiment, it is desirable to provide the distance in the X direction between the slope start positions 300g at the lower tip portion 300k of the slope portions 300c on both sides as short as possible. Therefore, the slope start positions 300g on both sides are provided inside the width V of the holding member 254 in the X direction to sufficiently secure the region of the contact portion 300e of the shoe mounting legs 300a.
 保持部材300は、図18(a)に示した係合部材151の係合部間隔151aaに挿入および係合可能に形成され、かつX方向においてシュー取付脚300aの幅Wよりも短い幅Vを有する連結部300hを有する。幅Wと幅Vは、先の実施形態と同様に日本工業規格(JIS)のB7101-1975「カメラの付属品取付座及び取付足」で寸法が規定されている。連結部300hが係合部材151と嵌合することによって、外部フラッシュユニット120のカメラ100に対するX方向での位置が決まる。また、シュー取付脚300aは、図17(a),(b)に示したアクセサリシュースプリング154の弾性変形部154aに当接することによってY方向上側に付勢され、これにより、シュー嵌合部300dの上面が係合部材151の下面と当接する。これにより、外部フラッシュユニット120のカメラ100に対するY方向での位置が決まる。 The holding member 300 is formed so that it can be inserted and engaged with the engaging portion spacing 151aa of the engaging member 151 shown in FIG. 18A, and has a width V shorter than the width W of the shoe mounting leg 300a in the X direction. It has a connecting portion 300h. The width W and the width V are defined by the Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) B7101-1975 "Camera accessory mounting seat and mounting foot" as in the previous embodiment. By fitting the connecting portion 300h with the engaging member 151, the position of the external flash unit 120 with respect to the camera 100 is determined in the X direction. Further, the shoe mounting leg 300a is urged upward in the Y direction by abutting on the elastically deformed portion 154a of the accessory shoe spring 154 shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, whereby the shoe fitting portion 300d is urged. The upper surface of the is in contact with the lower surface of the engaging member 151. As a result, the position of the external flash unit 120 with respect to the camera 100 is determined in the Y direction.
 さらに、接続端子コネクタ152のZ方向前側の当接面152bに対してシュー取付脚300aの当接部300eが当接することによって、外部フラッシュユニット120のカメラ100に対するZ方向での位置が決まる。
なお、保持部材300は、シュー取付脚300aと基台部250とを連結するための構造体でもあり、ロックピン252と接続端子257は連結部300hの内部に配置されている。
Further, the contact portion 300e of the shoe mounting leg 300a comes into contact with the contact surface 152b on the front side in the Z direction of the connection terminal connector 152, so that the position of the external flash unit 120 with respect to the camera 100 is determined in the Z direction.
The holding member 300 is also a structure for connecting the shoe mounting legs 300a and the base portion 250, and the lock pin 252 and the connecting terminal 257 are arranged inside the connecting portion 300h.
 なお、本実施形態では、カメラ100、アクセサリ200および中間アクセサリ300が21個または15個の接点を有する場合について説明したが、接点の数はこれら以外の数であってもよい。 In the present embodiment, the case where the camera 100, the accessory 200, and the intermediate accessory 300 have 21 or 15 contacts has been described, but the number of contacts may be other than these.
 また本実施形態では、アクセサリ200として、マイク機器やストロボ機器について説明したが、本発明にいうアクセサリには、電子ビューファインダユニット等のマイク機器やストロボ機器以外の様々な機器が含まれる。また、本実施形態では、電子機器としてカメラについて説明したが、本発明にいう電子機器にはカメラ以外の様々な電子機器も含まれる。
(その他の実施形態)
 本発明は、上述の実施形態の1以上の機能を実現するプログラムを、ネットワーク又は記憶媒体を介してシステム又は装置に供給し、そのシステム又は装置のコンピュータにおける1つ以上のプロセッサーがプログラムを読出し実行する処理でも実現可能である。また、1以上の機能を実現する回路(例えば、ASIC)によっても実現可能である。
Further, in the present embodiment, the microphone device and the strobe device have been described as the accessory 200, but the accessory referred to in the present invention includes various devices other than the microphone device such as the electronic viewfinder unit and the strobe device. Further, in the present embodiment, the camera has been described as an electronic device, but the electronic device referred to in the present invention also includes various electronic devices other than the camera.
(Other embodiments)
The present invention supplies a program that realizes one or more functions of the above-described embodiment to a system or device via a network or storage medium, and one or more processors in the computer of the system or device reads and executes the program. It can also be realized by the processing to be performed. It can also be realized by a circuit (for example, ASIC) that realizes one or more functions.
 以上説明した各実施形態は代表的な例にすぎず、本発明の実施に際しては、各実施形態に対して種々の変形や変更が可能である。
 
Each of the embodiments described above is only a typical example, and various modifications and changes can be made to each embodiment in carrying out the present invention.

Claims (14)

  1.  アクセサリが着脱可能に装着され、前記アクセサリと電気的に接続される複数の接点が一列に配列された電子機器であって、
     前記複数の接点は、前記電子機器への前記アクセサリの装着の検出に用いられる装着検出接点と、前記アクセサリから前記電子機器への通信要求に用いられる通信要求接点とを含み、
     前記装着検出接点と前記通信要求接点は、前記複数の接点の配列方向における最も一端側の接点と最も他端側の接点との間に配置され、
     前記装着検出接点は、前記通信要求接点と前記最も一端側の接点との間に配置されており、
     前記配列方向において、前記装着検出接点と前記通信要求接点との間の距離が、前記通信要求接点と前記最も他端側の接点との間の距離よりも短いことを特徴とする電子機器。
    An electronic device in which an accessory is detachably attached and a plurality of contacts electrically connected to the accessory are arranged in a row.
    The plurality of contacts include a mounting detection contact used for detecting the mounting of the accessory on the electronic device and a communication request contact used for a communication request from the accessory to the electronic device.
    The mounting detection contact and the communication request contact are arranged between the contact on the one end side and the contact on the other end side in the arrangement direction of the plurality of contacts.
    The mounting detection contact is arranged between the communication request contact and the contact on the farthest end side.
    An electronic device characterized in that, in the arrangement direction, the distance between the mounting detection contact and the communication request contact is shorter than the distance between the communication request contact and the contact on the farthest end side.
  2.  前記配列方向において、前記通信要求接点と前記最も一端側の接点との間の距離が、前記通信要求接点と前記最も他端側の接点との間の前記距離以下であることを特徴とする請求項1に記載の電子機器。 A claim characterized in that, in the arrangement direction, the distance between the communication request contact and the onemost end side contact is equal to or less than the distance between the communication request contact and the farthest end side contact. Item 1. The electronic device according to item 1.
  3.  前記配列方向において、前記装着検出接点と前記最も一端側の接点との間の距離が、前記装着検出接点と前記通信要求接点との間の前記距離以上であることを特徴とする請求項1または2に記載の電子機器。 1. 2. The electronic device according to 2.
  4.  前記装着検出接点を介して前記電子機器への前記アクセサリの装着を検出した場合において前記通信要求接点を介して前記通信要求を検出しないときに、エラー処理を行うことを特徴とする請求項1から3のいずれか一項に記載の電子機器。 1. From claim 1, wherein when the attachment of the accessory to the electronic device is detected via the attachment detection contact and the communication request is not detected via the communication request contact, error processing is performed. The electronic device according to any one of 3.
  5.  前記装着検出接点と前記通信要求接点との間および前記通信要求接点に対して前記装着検出接点とは反対側にそれぞれ、前記電子機器と前記アクセサリとの間の通信に用いられる通信接点が配置されていることを特徴とする請求項1から4のいずれか一項に記載の電子機器。 Communication contacts used for communication between the electronic device and the accessory are arranged between the mounting detection contact and the communication request contact and on the opposite side of the communication request contact from the mounting detection contact, respectively. The electronic device according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the electronic device is characterized by the above.
  6.  前記電子機器は、前記アクセサリとの間で、第1の通信方式での通信と該第1の通信方式とは異なる第2の通信方式での通信とが可能であり、
     前記通信要求接点に対して前記装着検出接点とは反対側に、前記第1の通信方式での通信に用いられる通信接点が配置され、
     前記通信要求接点と前記装着検出接点との間に、前記第2の通信方式での通信に用いられる通信接点が配置されていることを特徴とする請求項5に記載の電子機器。
    The electronic device can communicate with the accessory by a first communication method and a second communication method different from the first communication method.
    A communication contact used for communication in the first communication method is arranged on the side opposite to the mounting detection contact with respect to the communication request contact.
    The electronic device according to claim 5, wherein a communication contact used for communication in the second communication method is arranged between the communication request contact and the mounting detection contact.
  7.  請求項1から6のいずれか一項に記載の電子機器と、
     該電子機器に着脱可能に装着されるアクセサリとを有することを特徴とするシステム。
    The electronic device according to any one of claims 1 to 6.
    A system comprising an accessory that is detachably attached to the electronic device.
  8.  電子機器に着脱可能に装着され、前記電子機器と電気的に接続される複数の接点が一列に配列されたアクセサリであって、
     前記複数の接点は、前記電子機器への前記アクセサリの装着の検出に用いられる装着検出接点と、前記アクセサリから前記電子機器への通信要求に用いられる通信要求接点とを含み、
     前記装着検出接点と前記通信要求接点は、前記複数の接点の配列方向における最も一端側の接点と最も他端側の接点との間に配置され、
     前記装着検出接点は、前記通信要求接点と前記最も一端側の接点との間に配置されており、
     前記配列方向において、前記装着検出接点と前記通信要求接点との間の距離が、前記通信要求接点と前記最も他端側の接点との間の距離よりも短いことを特徴とするアクセサリ。
    An accessory that is detachably attached to an electronic device and has a plurality of contacts that are electrically connected to the electronic device arranged in a row.
    The plurality of contacts include a mounting detection contact used for detecting the mounting of the accessory on the electronic device and a communication request contact used for a communication request from the accessory to the electronic device.
    The mounting detection contact and the communication request contact are arranged between the contact on the one end side and the contact on the other end side in the arrangement direction of the plurality of contacts.
    The mounting detection contact is arranged between the communication request contact and the contact on the farthest end side.
    An accessory characterized in that, in the arrangement direction, the distance between the mounting detection contact and the communication request contact is shorter than the distance between the communication request contact and the farthest end contact.
  9.  前記配列方向において、前記通信要求接点と前記最も一端側の接点との間の距離が、前記通信要求接点と前記最も他端側の接点との間の前記距離以下であることを特徴とする請求項8に記載のアクセサリ。 A claim characterized in that, in the arrangement direction, the distance between the communication request contact and the onemost end side contact is equal to or less than the distance between the communication request contact and the farthest end side contact. Item 8. The accessory according to item 8.
  10.  前記配列方向において、前記装着検出接点と前記最も一端側の接点との間の距離が、前記装着検出接点と前記通信要求接点との間の前記距離以上であることを特徴とする請求項8または9に記載のアクセサリ。 8. The accessory described in 9.
  11.  前記複数の接点が、前記電子機器に設けられた複数の接点への接触方向に向かって凸形状を有する保持部材により保持されていることを特徴とする請求項8から10のいずれか一項に記載のアクセサリ。 According to any one of claims 8 to 10, the plurality of contacts are held by a holding member having a convex shape toward the contact direction with the plurality of contacts provided in the electronic device. Described accessories.
  12.  前記装着検出接点と前記通信要求接点との間および前記通信要求接点に対して前記装着検出接点とは反対側にそれぞれ、前記電子機器と前記アクセサリとの間の通信に用いられる通信接点が配置されていることを特徴とする請求項7から10のいずれか一項に記載のアクセサリ。 Communication contacts used for communication between the electronic device and the accessory are arranged between the mounting detection contact and the communication request contact and on the opposite side of the communication request contact from the mounting detection contact, respectively. The accessory according to any one of claims 7 to 10, wherein the accessory is provided.
  13.  前記アクセサリは、前記電子機器との間で、第1の通信方式での通信と該第1の通信方式とは異なる第2の通信方式での通信とが可能であり、
     前記通信要求接点に対して前記装着検出接点とは反対側に、前記第1の通信方式での通信に用いられる接点が配置され、
     前記通信要求接点と前記装着検出接点との間に、前記第2の通信方式での通信に用いられる接点が配置されていることを特徴とする請求項12に記載のアクセサリ。
    The accessory can communicate with the electronic device by a first communication method and a second communication method different from the first communication method.
    A contact used for communication in the first communication method is arranged on the side opposite to the mounting detection contact with respect to the communication request contact.
    The accessory according to claim 12, wherein a contact used for communication in the second communication method is arranged between the communication request contact and the mounting detection contact.
  14.  電子機器と、
     該電子機器に着脱可能に装着される請求項8から13のいずれか一項に記載のアクセサリとを有することを特徴とするシステム。
    With electronic devices
    A system comprising the accessory according to any one of claims 8 to 13, which is detachably attached to the electronic device.
PCT/JP2021/014288 2020-04-09 2021-04-02 Electronic device and accessory WO2021206009A1 (en)

Priority Applications (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202410030245.2A CN117850125A (en) 2020-04-09 2021-04-02 Electronic device and accessory
EP21785644.2A EP4024128A4 (en) 2020-04-09 2021-04-02 Electronic device and accessory
BR112021021885A BR112021021885A2 (en) 2020-04-09 2021-04-02 ELECTRONIC APPLIANCE AND ACCESSORIES
CN202180003706.1A CN113906341B (en) 2020-04-09 2021-04-02 Electronic device and accessory
US17/533,904 US11886099B2 (en) 2020-04-09 2021-11-23 Electronic apparatus and accessory
US18/514,042 US20240085764A1 (en) 2020-04-09 2023-11-20 Electronic apparatus and accessory

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020070625 2020-04-09
JP2020-070626 2020-04-09
JP2020-070627 2020-04-09
JP2020070627 2020-04-09
JP2020-070625 2020-04-09
JP2020070626 2020-04-09
JP2021-060601 2021-03-31
JP2021060601A JP7087152B2 (en) 2020-04-09 2021-03-31 Electronics and accessories

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/533,904 Continuation US11886099B2 (en) 2020-04-09 2021-11-23 Electronic apparatus and accessory

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021206009A1 true WO2021206009A1 (en) 2021-10-14

Family

ID=78023245

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2021/014288 WO2021206009A1 (en) 2020-04-09 2021-04-02 Electronic device and accessory

Country Status (7)

Country Link
US (2) US11886099B2 (en)
EP (1) EP4024128A4 (en)
JP (1) JP2022118055A (en)
CN (2) CN117850125A (en)
BR (1) BR112021021885A2 (en)
TW (1) TWI837465B (en)
WO (1) WO2021206009A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024209877A1 (en) * 2023-04-06 2024-10-10 株式会社ニコン Imaging device and accessory

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
BR112021021885A2 (en) * 2020-04-09 2022-12-06 Canon Kk ELECTRONIC APPLIANCE AND ACCESSORIES

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2012189980A (en) * 2011-02-25 2012-10-04 Nikon Corp Accessory, camera body, and camera system
JP2013034172A (en) 2011-06-30 2013-02-14 Nikon Corp Accessory, camera, accessory shoe, and connector
JP2013048404A (en) * 2011-07-22 2013-03-07 Nikon Corp Camera system, accessory, camera, camera system control program, accessory control program, and camera control program
JP2020024378A (en) * 2018-06-29 2020-02-13 キヤノン株式会社 Imaging apparatus, accessory apparatus and communication control method therefor

Family Cites Families (59)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE3503726A1 (en) 1984-02-04 1985-08-08 Ricoh Co., Ltd., Tokio/Tokyo PHOTOGRAPHIC SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONIC FLASH
US5384611A (en) 1991-05-20 1995-01-24 Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha Camera system capable of wireless flash photographing
JP2769524B2 (en) 1994-05-09 1998-06-25 株式会社ニコン Interchangeable lens and camera system
JPH09185103A (en) 1996-01-05 1997-07-15 Nikon Corp Connector for electronic equipment and optical system
JP3685908B2 (en) 1997-05-30 2005-08-24 富士通コンポーネント株式会社 High-speed transmission connector
JP2000184264A (en) * 1998-12-14 2000-06-30 Olympus Optical Co Ltd Camera
JP4375268B2 (en) 2004-04-27 2009-12-02 ソニー株式会社 Electronic and accessory equipment
US7612826B2 (en) 2004-04-27 2009-11-03 Sony Corporation Electronic device and accessory device
JP2006064763A (en) * 2004-08-24 2006-03-09 Sony Corp Imaging device, and setup changing method thereof
JP4392363B2 (en) * 2005-02-14 2009-12-24 富士フイルム株式会社 camera
US7331802B2 (en) 2005-11-02 2008-02-19 Tyco Electronics Corporation Orthogonal connector
JP5275564B2 (en) 2006-12-22 2013-08-28 本田技研工業株式会社 Fuel cell stack
JP4527140B2 (en) 2007-08-07 2010-08-18 日立オートモティブシステムズ株式会社 In-vehicle camera device
JP5247859B2 (en) 2010-10-27 2013-07-24 キヤノン株式会社 Imaging device and control method thereof, accessory and control method thereof, and imaging device system
KR101780022B1 (en) 2011-01-25 2017-09-19 삼성전자주식회사 Adapter for flash of camera
JP5445479B2 (en) 2011-01-28 2014-03-19 株式会社ニコン Camera accessories, accessory side mount, camera body and body side mount
JP5556842B2 (en) 2011-06-30 2014-07-23 株式会社ニコン Accessories, cameras, accessory shoes, and connectors
CN102854711A (en) * 2011-06-30 2013-01-02 株式会社尼康 Accessory, camera, accessory shoe, and connector
JP5310899B2 (en) 2011-06-30 2013-10-09 株式会社ニコン Accessories, cameras, accessory shoes, and connectors
US8755684B2 (en) 2011-07-22 2014-06-17 Nikon Corporation Adapter, camera system, and adapter control program
US20130028586A1 (en) * 2011-07-22 2013-01-31 Nikon Corporation Camera system, accessory, camera, camera system control program, accessory control program, and camera control program
JP5862148B2 (en) 2011-07-25 2016-02-16 株式会社ニコン Camera body, camera system, and program
JP5894397B2 (en) 2011-08-29 2016-03-30 キヤノン株式会社 Imaging apparatus, accessory, and imaging system
TWI468840B (en) 2012-02-28 2015-01-11 Canon Kk Camera accessory device that is removably attached to camera-side accessory shoe
JP5955136B2 (en) 2012-07-05 2016-07-20 キヤノン株式会社 Camera accessories and cameras
CN104204939B (en) 2012-04-04 2018-05-04 佳能株式会社 Camera and camera accessory
EP3543786B1 (en) * 2012-04-04 2022-05-18 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Camera and camera accessory
EP2848994A4 (en) 2012-05-08 2016-05-11 Nikon Corp Accessory, camera body
JP5996286B2 (en) * 2012-06-12 2016-09-21 オリンパス株式会社 External strobe device and imaging device
JP5701267B2 (en) 2012-07-20 2015-04-15 キヤノン株式会社 Cameras and camera accessories
JP2015023076A (en) 2013-07-17 2015-02-02 船井電機株式会社 Shield structure of signal line and signal transmission method
JP3187195U (en) 2013-09-03 2013-11-14 ティアック株式会社 Camera shoe extension device
JP2015075503A (en) 2013-10-04 2015-04-20 株式会社ニコン Display accessory
CN105637399B (en) * 2013-10-09 2017-12-22 夏普株式会社 The manufacture method of camara module and camara module
CN105705995B (en) 2013-11-08 2018-07-27 富士胶片株式会社 Camera system, replaces camera lens and communication means at camera body
US9571151B2 (en) * 2014-02-06 2017-02-14 Olloclip, Llc Cases for mobile electronic devices configured to receive auxiliary optical devices
JP2016166967A (en) 2015-03-10 2016-09-15 キヤノン株式会社 Camera system
US9703173B2 (en) * 2015-04-21 2017-07-11 Apple Inc. Camera module structure having electronic device connections formed therein
JP6584129B2 (en) * 2015-05-07 2019-10-02 キヤノン株式会社 Lighting device
CN108351579B (en) * 2015-10-30 2020-11-06 佳能株式会社 Electronic device
WO2017073081A1 (en) 2015-10-30 2017-05-04 キヤノン株式会社 Electronic device
JP6918470B2 (en) 2016-11-24 2021-08-11 キヤノン株式会社 Accessory shoe device, imaging device, and accessories
JP6716271B2 (en) 2016-02-03 2020-07-01 キヤノン株式会社 Signal terminal connector for accessory, accessory shoe device, imaging device, and accessory
US9985399B2 (en) * 2016-02-03 2018-05-29 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Accessory shoe device to which accessory is attached, image pickup apparatus, and accessory
JP2017151161A (en) 2016-02-22 2017-08-31 株式会社ニコン Accessory and imaging device
JP2017151160A (en) * 2016-02-22 2017-08-31 株式会社ニコン Accessory and imaging device
TWI771631B (en) 2017-05-31 2022-07-21 日商佳能股份有限公司 Mount apparatus and accessory for imaging apparatus
RU2724459C2 (en) 2017-05-31 2020-06-23 Кэнон Кабусики Кайся Lens device, an image capturing device on which lens device can be mounted, and a camera system
TWI776256B (en) 2017-05-31 2022-09-01 日商佳能股份有限公司 Mount apparatus and accessories
RU2714847C2 (en) 2017-05-31 2020-02-19 Кэнон Кабусики Кайся Image capturing device and accessories
JP2018207427A (en) 2017-06-09 2018-12-27 キヤノン株式会社 Imaging apparatus
JP6918594B2 (en) 2017-06-22 2021-08-11 キヤノン株式会社 Imaging device
JP6455577B1 (en) 2017-10-26 2019-01-23 株式会社ニコン accessory
JP2019078933A (en) 2017-10-26 2019-05-23 株式会社ニコン accessory
CN110661964A (en) * 2018-06-28 2020-01-07 佳能株式会社 Image pickup apparatus, accessory apparatus, communication control method therefor, and storage medium
US11412125B2 (en) 2018-06-29 2022-08-09 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Imaging apparatus, accessory apparatus, and communication control method
JP7327915B2 (en) 2018-08-30 2023-08-16 キヤノン株式会社 Imaging device
JP7099303B2 (en) * 2018-12-19 2022-07-12 株式会社ニコン Accessories, camera bodies and electronic devices
BR112021021885A2 (en) * 2020-04-09 2022-12-06 Canon Kk ELECTRONIC APPLIANCE AND ACCESSORIES

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2012189980A (en) * 2011-02-25 2012-10-04 Nikon Corp Accessory, camera body, and camera system
JP2013034172A (en) 2011-06-30 2013-02-14 Nikon Corp Accessory, camera, accessory shoe, and connector
JP2013048404A (en) * 2011-07-22 2013-03-07 Nikon Corp Camera system, accessory, camera, camera system control program, accessory control program, and camera control program
JP2020024378A (en) * 2018-06-29 2020-02-13 キヤノン株式会社 Imaging apparatus, accessory apparatus and communication control method therefor

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP4024128A4

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024209877A1 (en) * 2023-04-06 2024-10-10 株式会社ニコン Imaging device and accessory

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2022118055A (en) 2022-08-12
EP4024128A1 (en) 2022-07-06
CN113906341B (en) 2024-01-09
US11886099B2 (en) 2024-01-30
CN113906341A (en) 2022-01-07
US20220082905A1 (en) 2022-03-17
CN117850125A (en) 2024-04-09
EP4024128A4 (en) 2024-02-21
BR112021021885A2 (en) 2022-12-06
US20240085764A1 (en) 2024-03-14
TW202210925A (en) 2022-03-16
TWI837465B (en) 2024-04-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021206009A1 (en) Electronic device and accessory
CN217692026U (en) Socket device, accessory socket device, and electronic device
US20230400754A1 (en) Electronic apparatus and accessory
WO2021206000A1 (en) Electronic device and accessory
JP7005804B2 (en) Electronics and accessories
WO2021206006A1 (en) Electronic device, and accessory
WO2021205998A1 (en) Electronic device and accessory
WO2021205999A1 (en) Electronic apparatus and accessory

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: BR

Ref legal event code: B01A

Ref document number: 112021021885

Country of ref document: BR

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21785644

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021785644

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20220329

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 112021021885

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20211029